JP6645419B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one end of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so as to allow a ball to communicate with each other and a separated state in which the ball is separated are formed. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-171636 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to stably throw a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the feeding of a ball from a first passage member to a second passage member. I do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced, One end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member are communicated with each other so that a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is the second passage member. The first passage member and the second passage member are separated from one end of the passage member so that a separated state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated can be formed, and one end of the first passage member or the second passage member can be formed. A connecting member disposed to be displaceable and communicating between one ends of the first and second passage members in a state where the first and second passage members are displaced by contacting the other of the first and second passage members; And the connecting member Includes a biasing means for maintaining given to a predetermined position, and wherein in the separated state, restricts the ball entrance of the sphere to the position or the second passage member for regulating the discharge of balls from said first passage member the connecting member to the position Ru is disposed.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the throwing of a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side slide member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is an arrow of FIG. It is a rear view of the connection member seen in XXVIc direction. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the rotation member, a part of the pitching device, and the guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotation axis of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a division member. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 1st area. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 2nd area. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged in the holding position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged at the separated position. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding pieces are arranged at a protruding position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 9 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member with the divided member and the phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the elements on larger scale which expanded the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a), and (c) FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a driving-side slide member. (A) is a front view of a light emitting unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the light emitting unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a light emitting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a light emitting unit. (A) is a front view of the base member, (b) is a top view of the base member, and (c) is a bottom view of the base member. (A) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of a range XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a sectional view of the light emitting unit in XCVa-XCVa of FIG. 94 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light emitting unit in a range XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 94A is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit taken along line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 94A, and FIG. 96B is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit taken along a range XCVIb in FIG. 96A. (A) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a sectional view of the light emitting unit in the tenth embodiment, and (b) of FIG. 99 is a bottom view of the light emitting unit. (A) is a front view of a lifting body in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 100 (b) is a rear view of the lifting body. It is an exploded perspective front view of a raising / lowering body. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a raising / lowering body. It is sectional drawing of a raising / lowering body in the CIII-CIII line of FIG.100 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the upper elevating unit along the line CIVa-CIVa in FIG. 12, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper elevating unit along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body taken along the line CVa-CVa of FIG. 100 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body taken along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 106 (a) and FIG. 106 (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the elevating body. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the raising / lowering body in 12th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a raising / lowering body. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the raising / lowering body in 13th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a raising / lowering body. It is sectional drawing of the raising / lowering body in 14th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the upper raising / lowering unit in 15th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the upper elevating unit in a range CXIII in FIG. 112. (A) is a front view of a 2nd gear, (b) is a side view of a 2nd gear. (A) is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device, and (b) is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device in a range CXVb of FIG. 115 (a). (A) is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device, and (b) is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device in a range CXVIb of FIG. 116 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 16th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 17th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 18th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 19th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 20th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of the raising / lowering body and transmission device in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a sectional view of the light emitting unit in the twenty-second embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the light emitting unit in the twenty-third embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the production | presentation part in 24th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the production | presentation part in the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a). It is a disassembled perspective back view of the raising / lowering body in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the elevating body, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction. By sliding the ball-pulling lever 52 in the rearward direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place, is indicated by a lighting state, the number of retained balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (opened state), a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared to the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can be easily placed in the second winning opening 640 during the probable change and during the working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (extended state), so that the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 can be created during the probability change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where the winning is possible.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the motorized accessory. It is more advantageous for the player to set the state and aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  A second variable winning device 82a is provided at the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (becomes an enlarged state) at the time of a specific big hit (for example, a 15R probability changing big hit), a special game state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 82 is set. Can be.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  FIGS. 6 and 7 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the liquid crystal 520 is connected to the liquid crystal lifting unit 520, and FIG. FIGS. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and includes an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit in an inner space of the rear case 210. 500, a rotation unit 600, and a light emitting decoration member 700 are respectively housed.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 212 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 has a concave portion having a substantially circular frontal shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the concave portion. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are connected to the upper edge, the left edge, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating members 330 are independently provided in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be able to move up and down (up and down) (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When the 330 is arranged at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 that are disposed in a vertical position with their axes aligned in the vertical direction and that are disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction. A drive slide member 420 and a driven slide member 430 supported so as to be slidably displaceable, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive slide member 420 up and down are provided. The drive motor 441 drives the drive slide member 420 up and down. Accordingly, the driven slide member 430 is moved up and down by being driven.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  Note that the drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a third symbol display device 81. When the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. 9). When the drive-side slide member 420 is located at the ascending position, the upper area of the third symbol display device 81 is located on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings around the base end in a direction in which the distal end is moved up and down. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the front end side, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the front end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while When swinging in the direction of swinging the distal end side down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 to the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The thrown ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). The inflow ball is sent to the game area via a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

  The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotating disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction are colored red or black and different numbers are displayed. (A display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) corresponding to a pocket to be thrown, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (a pitching device 650) is provided. It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the lower position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is at the connection position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of a member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown until it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket are They are exposed and made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and forms a light emitted from the LED (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time), an effect by light emission is performed.

  The center frame 86 of the game board 13 has a substrate member for irradiating light and a light guide for radiating light emitted from the substrate member 850 into the inside at the right inner edge of the opening portion opened in the center. The light emitting unit 800 including the members 810 and 820 is provided.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the ascending position. In FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 are arranged in the width direction of the base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape. It is configured to be able to move up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting / lowering body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; It mainly includes a driving device 340 which is fastened and fixed to the back cover 320 and generates a driving force required for the elevating member to move up and down, and a transmission device 350 which transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating member 330. .

  The base member 310 includes a semicircular recessed portion 311 which is formed in a semicircular shape in which the center of the circle is disposed at the lower end and which is recessed from the front side surface to the rear side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side surface. A guide rib portion 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap left and right.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are in a vertical line. Is arranged at the position that matches. Thus, when the rendering section 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position in front of the base member 310 up to a position where the rendering section 331 interferes with the semicircular concave section 311, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. Also, it is possible to secure a large moving width of the staging unit 331.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where the guide rib portion 312 can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in an assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction during the elevating movement (parallel movement or tilting operation).

  Further, by forming the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging a mechanical portion (a portion not intended to be visually recognized by a player, such as a gear and a motor).

  The rear cover 320 includes a main body 321 configured in a case shape with the front side and the lower part opened, a cylindrical shaft support 322 protruding from the main body 321 to the front, and a front surface from the shaft support 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole formed in a position displaced in the left-right direction with the extension direction coinciding with the vertical direction, and a shaft support portion from the bottom where the upper shaft support portion 322 protrudes. 322, and a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction.

  The shaft support 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, respectively, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed vertically above and vertically below the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position, respectively, the first The end of the locking arc 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extending vertically in a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. , Is provided.

  The rendering section 331 is a section in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and performs rendering by displaying patterns and graphics on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a protruding to the rear side and protruding to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332a does not have a plurality of protrusions but one protrusion. Therefore, the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, so that the space for disposing the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction can be suppressed, and a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can contact the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position, the rack 332 is not moved in the left-right direction. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the staging portion 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left and right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

  The driving device 340 includes a driving motor 341 that is a driving source fastened and fixed to the rear cover 320, and a driving gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of a driving shaft of the driving motor 341 and transmits driving force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 are provided with the independent driving motors 341, respectively. It can be individually raised and lowered. Since the technical ideas of the lifting members 330 are common, the lifting member 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the description of the other lifting members 330 will be omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16B is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16C is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. In the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a, a portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted is extended to about half the length of the gear teeth (extends to a pitch circle C1 where the contacts of the meshing teeth are connected). Abutment portion 351b formed in the radial direction with an extension length), and a lock projecting from the rear side surface of main body portion 351a in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis. And an arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has a distal end surface in a radial direction having an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (circular arc) of approximately two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose distal end in the circumferential direction can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the rear cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. Has a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the second gear 352 includes two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the rear side, and has an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially irregular tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). And a transmission gear unit 355.

  The intermediate plate 353 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from the distal ends of the gear teeth of the modified gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (refer to FIG. 15)) overlaps in a direction parallel to the tooth surface and can be brought into contact with the mating member (refer to FIG. 17). The movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of the 330 can be suppressed.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b formed on a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the main body 354a where the gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (the right side of FIG. 16C) And an adjacent gear tooth 354c adjacent to the end).

  The receiving portion 354b extends counterclockwise from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward. ) Is formed at an arrangement angle of about two gear teeth (approximately 30 degrees to 50 degrees), and when the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b is formed. And the tooth height of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a half of the tooth height (tooth length extending to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connection wall portion 354b2 has an overhang length that is approximately half the radial extension length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side opposite to the connection wall portion 354b2. The connecting wall 354b2 is formed integrally with the connecting wall 354b2 so as to protrude radially from the connecting wall 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 has a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is in the posture of being arranged, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc of the radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c have the radius r of the radius r). It is limited to formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation are common, the ascending operation will be described here, and the explanation of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the distance-up operation has been performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 has started to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352. In FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c is released. FIG. 20 illustrates a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 19.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) being transmitted to the rack 332 via the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. You. More specifically, the driving force of the driving gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the driving gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  Further, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320 abut, so that the first gear 351 is formed. Is mechanically prevented from rotating in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is moved down) when viewed from the front.

  Accordingly, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 moves down can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 332 a (see FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), thereby preventing the slide shaft 332a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of elevating the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354 c. Therefore, the load (the load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b having a greater strength than other gear teeth. Thus, the durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is brought close to the position where it rubs against the wall 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear tooth 354c at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to one side in the circumferential direction to the connecting wall portion 354b2, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radially extending length of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in a direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion 354b also increases. Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. Accordingly, the resistance of the adjacent gear teeth 354c to deformation in the circumferential direction increases. This can prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in a state immediately after the lifting / lowering body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the arc-shaped tip of the abutting portion 351b abuts on the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotation direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. You.

  Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the elevating body 330 starts moving in the falling direction. It starts to rotate in the direction for lowering (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range of rotation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), so that the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact part 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in the direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  The circumferential direction component Fb is directed in the rotation direction of the first gear 351, but since the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b contact at a point, the circumferential component Fb slides between the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b. And the first gear 351 is not easily rotated, so that it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, since the abutting portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The contact portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r around the first gear 351. As shown in FIG. , The rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thus, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and to stop the drive motor 341. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c contacts the upper locking portion 324. Between FIG. 18 and FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated. The position of 354c is aligned with the position of the second gear 352, so that the state where the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b in the state shown in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  Since the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the rotation of the second gear 352 in the direction for moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20) is restricted. Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the second gear 352 has a curved wall portion 354b1 along an arc shape with a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the side of the second gear 352), only the first gear 351 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 19 (counterclockwise direction).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than the other gear teeth (about the thickness of two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at the intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b at the contact position is the same. And the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  In addition, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is kept low. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail below. The rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, the movement of the rack 332 in both the up and down directions in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position is regulated, so that it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the ascending direction) with a conventional crank mechanism, and is first achieved by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. Things.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the rotation of the second gear 352 in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or greater than its own weight in order to maintain the position at the ascending position, and it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

  Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 at the ascending position by using the dead point of the crank mechanism, but in this case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the size of the transmission portion can be reduced.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 in the direction of lowering the elevating body 330 (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) is allowed.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19, and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact part 351b is not rotated). The leading end surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can move downward. That is, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 can release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a drive-side slide member 420 having a staging portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and performing an ascending / descending operation, and a member that moves up and down following the drive-side slide member 420. And a driven side slide member 430 provided with a third symbol display device 81. The driven side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-like members, a driving slide member 420 configured to be capable of vertically elevating and lowering, A driven slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be operable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 for generating a driving force for the drive slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the driving force to the driving slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430, and lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And a lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that vertically coincides with both upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and that opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 configured and a member disposed inside (vertical to the other base member 410) of a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extending to the front side of the main body member 411. A stopper 413, a first shaft support 414 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the side opposite to the locking part 413 across a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support 412, A lowering regulating member 415 which is supported by the shaft supporting portion 414 and regulates a lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420; and a column-shaped protruding member which is disposed below the first shaft supporting portion 414 and is in front of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and has an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the front opening of the guide rod support 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven slide member 430, and the driven slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. Regulate.

  The descent regulating member 415 and the ascent regulating member 417 are members that rotate in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving slide member 420 and have a role of regulating the movement of the driven slide member 430, which will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that has both left and right ends fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are slidably supported by the guide rods 451, and move up and down by following the lifting and lowering operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be long in the left-right direction, function units 432 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, A guide hole 433 which is a hole bored in the vertical direction in 432 and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted; a hook-shaped portion 434 which extends upward and downward in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the function portion 432; It mainly includes a fall prevention portion 435 extending rearward inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the function portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked on the elevation regulating member 417. When the driven slide member 430 is located at the lowered position, the lift regulating member 417 wraps around and engages with the engagement surface 434a, which is the upper surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), so that the driven slide can be performed. The member 430 can be prevented from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it can be prevented from bouncing due to the recoil of the fall). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising regulating member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the horizontal direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engagement claw 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engagement claw 417e. Also have a shape that fits down. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the rotation operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is slidably supported by the guide rod 451, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. The rack mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (the inside of the pair of drive gears 442), and a vertically long plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452 to the front side.

  The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of receiving the urging force of the elevation restriction member 417 to move the rack 452 in a direction away from the drive gear 442, and details will be described later. I do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent such that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount toward the back side compared to the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 formed in the left half portion of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner inclining upward toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. And a tubular passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed. It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the driving side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering unit 422a configured of a circular liquid crystal. portion and the second passage forming member 422 which groove ball can pass in front view leftward from the disc portion while being fastened from the front side in the center of the body member 421 is extended, the second copies passage thereof the wiring housing member 423 having one end portion in a front view the left lower portion of the forming member 422 and the other end is supported is supported in the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, the second copies path forming member 422 mainly the connecting member 424 acts as a portion for introducing the balls into the groove 422b of the second copies path forming member 422 has a passage extending through along the circumferential direction of the shaft while being axially supported, to include.

  The main body member 421 is open to the front side to a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and to a portion that extends from the center to the left as viewed from the front. Mainly includes a groove 421b disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a manner, and a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a lower left end of the groove 421b with a size larger than the diameter of the sphere. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the rear side and extends in the vertical direction, and the open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, so that the guide rod is provided. 451 (see FIG. 22) is formed.

  The groove 421b is a member that forms a path of a sphere in cooperation with the second path forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. You.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes a rendering portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, a shaft support portion 422b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the rear side, A sensor member 422c disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detecting passage of a ball, and a groove that is opened to the rear side with a width that allows the ball that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down. A groove 422d having the same shape, a guide 422e forming a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the shaft support 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed at the center.

  The shaft support 422b is a portion where the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. I do.

  The wire housing member 423 is a member that houses a wire that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and that is connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and that is supported by the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 in a front view. It mainly includes a main body 423a, which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b protruding rearward from the lower end of the main body 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and has a shape that is curved in a manner to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. You. Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the position of the pivot support with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being broken and broken.

  The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 has a cylindrical portion 424a formed in a cylindrical shape and supported by the shaft supporting portion 422b, and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper wall portion 424b with a length longer than the diameter of the sphere below the upper wall portion 424b in a front view. And a connection cover 424d that connects the rear side end portions of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c and is provided between the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical portion 424a. And a torsion spring 424e for applying a downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) urging force to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-shaped part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion curved and formed along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and has a space between the upper wall portion 424b and the upper wall portion 424b. Will be arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses the sphere passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the rear side. The opening of the connecting member 424 on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connection member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 is oriented in the left-right direction. In FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to an upwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is directed obliquely upward, and FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state described later (see FIG. 41), and FIG. This corresponds to a communication state described later (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable around the shaft support 422 b in a state of being housed in the housing recess 422 f of the second passage forming member 422, and The front side end surfaces of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c abut on the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The accommodation recess 422f is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the shaft supporting portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion facing the lower wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. 27. The curved wall portion 422f1 and a surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). And a facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is radially contacted with the lower wall portion 424c in the downwardly inclined state of the connection member 424, the displacement of the connection member 424 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When the 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connection member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when the fitting between the shaft supporting portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft supporting portion is reduced, so that the connection is performed unless a load from another member occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from another member.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 communicate with each other. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has rolled and passed through the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c After passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c). Is smaller than or equal to the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stopped by the connection member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in FIG. FIGS. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the lowered position, and the illustration of a pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering restriction member 415 and the raising restriction member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 contacts the release convex portion 417c of the raising restriction member 417. The outline of 452 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the up and down directions, it is possible to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

  In addition, a lift restricting member 417 and a locking portion 413 are provided with a guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 therebetween, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven slide member 430, so that the function is improved. The portion 432 can be prevented from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by a player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the vertical position of the lifting control member 417 and the locking portion 413 are displaced from each other, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the lifting control member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Note that, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the rising regulating member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the driving slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is The lifting operation of the member 420 can be hardly hindered. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descending regulation member 415 is disposed in front of the elevation regulating member 417, and the height at which the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (length of the rack 452 protruding from the vicinity of the tooth root). Is set to a height short of reaching the descent control member 415, so that the descent control member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent control member 415. In addition, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the elevation regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulation member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent restricting member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the lowered position and is disposed at the connection position, and a pair of right and left cover members in the cover member 470 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 31, the lowering regulating member 415 and the rising regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the connection position, a ball can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 31, the lift regulating member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end of the contact wall 453 comes into contact with the rise regulating member 417, Rotation can be performed between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. Note that the release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, but refers to a state in which the elevation restriction member 417 has been rotated from a position vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a position where the elevation restriction member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylinder portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from the end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection At the protruding end of the hook-shaped portion 417d, the hook-shaped portion 434 extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is disposed above and inside (upper left of the enlarged view in FIG. 29) the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. A dovetail portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion formed around the cylindrical portion 417a is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. How to wrap the elevation regulating member 417 inward by being locked Mainly includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the engagement claw 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 (the engagement claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). The movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of the driven member 417e).

  The release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the rising regulating member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. When the rack 452 is raised from this state to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the lift restricting member 417 is wound in the outer winding direction (the clockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), The engaging protrusion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed only by the elevation operation of the rack 452. For this reason, for example, as compared with a case where a solenoid member for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is separately provided, a driving device for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is also used by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22). And the number of driving devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the rise regulating member 417 from being operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation regulating member 417 is operated in accordance with the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), It is possible to prevent the operation timing of the rack 452 and the lifting control member 417 from being synchronized with each other and to cause an operation failure. When the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the lifting control member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be done. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted up while the rise restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, so that an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging projection 417d of the rise restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is raised, and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 is brought into contact with the lower end of the driven slide member 430, so that the rack 452 continues the lift operation. Only when the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling while the driven slide member 430 is separated from the driven slide member 430. When the member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is configured, and the driving force required for raising the driven side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the driving slide member 420 pushes up the driven slide member 430 during the ascent operation of the drive slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the disengagement between the driven slide member 430 and the engagement portion is performed. Can be performed by the operation of pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to make the engagement state enough to be released by the pushing up force of the driven side slide member 430, and it is difficult to firmly engage. Becomes In addition, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to a reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  In the present embodiment, on the other hand, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation regulating member 417 and retracting the elevation regulating member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven-side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate can be different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for release.

  Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when performing the releasing operation of the elevation restriction member 417, it is difficult for the driven side slide member 430 to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of the release is released. Posture can be stabilized.

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage 463 of the lower front plate member 460 communicate with each other. Thus, the sphere flowing down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a state where the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the protruding plate 453a of the transmission device 450 abuts on the lowering regulating member 415, and FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the raised plate 453a is disposed at the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the elevation restriction member 417 is in contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the direction in which the release protrusion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the elevating operation.

  Since the lift regulating member 417 is urged in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, the load in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be hung. Accordingly, the driving slide member 420 is urged in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the driving slide member 420 during the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c returns the pair of left and right driving slide members 420 to the center position. The ascending restriction member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release protrusion 417c, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased by further rotating the lift regulating member 417 to the release side. While the force for pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, the torsion spring 417g is rotated by rotating the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release projection 417c. Is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force for pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the elevation regulating member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 approach each other in the left-right direction, so that an increase in drive resistance can be suppressed (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction approaching the drive gear 442, the lift regulating member 417 is wound outward (the engagement protrusion 417 d is formed on the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). In this case, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g increases, and the urging force increases, so that the urging force for pushing back the drive side slide member 420 increases, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond a gap provided in a support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. Thereby, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the meshing resistance. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are arranged at the ascending position, the lower surface of the projection plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 has the release projection 415 c of the descent regulating member 415. Contact the upper surface (locked state).

  The protruding plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower surface, which is inclined upward and outward toward the left and right.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extended plate 415b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extended plates 415b. A release protrusion 415c vertically projecting from an end (upper end) and having a semicircular tip is formed, and one end is connected to the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. And a torsion spring 415d for urging the descending restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the driving motor 441 can be reduced.

  In addition, the rotation of the descent restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release convex portion 415c of the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the descent restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be used as well, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulation member 415, the elevation regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering regulating member 415 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 30) as compared with the raising regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the rising regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. And the rear side surface of the descent restricting member 415 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The descent regulating member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-back direction. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the elevation regulating member 417 are in contact in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 33), and the contact wall 453 and the downward regulation member 415 are in the front-rear direction (see FIG. (Vertical direction). Thereby, the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rising regulating member 417, and the longitudinal direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442) can be reduced by the descending regulating member 415. The rattling can be suppressed.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to cause the rack 452 to fall forward in a state where the rack 452 is arranged at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the protruding plate 453a applies a load to the release protruding portion 415c, thereby lowering the lowering restricting member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). Thus, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be moved downward. That is, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (the driving source can be used as well), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the locking of the lowering regulating member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the lowering of the lowering operation is performed with the operation timing shifted as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that it is possible to prevent the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415 from being overloaded.

  In the structure in which both the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the locking of each member at the raised position is performed by the driven slide member 430. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated, and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 430 is maintained at the raised position by locking the drive slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. Therefore, the number of necessary configurations can be reduced (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be used). In addition, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is performed solely by the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 moves down on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be lower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Also in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 contacts the elevation restriction member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417, and the elevation restriction member 417 can be rotated. By the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the lift regulating member 417 and the hook 434 can be engaged with each other.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swinging unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82 is played. A passage for passage is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b for detecting that a ball has passed is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82. Note that the sensor member 82b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward and to the right in a front view, and is a unit that performs an effect by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of an L-shaped plate in a front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a front-rear direction right end of the main body member in a front-rear direction, and a shaft support hole. A first wall portion 513 which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape whose surface faces in the front-rear direction, and at least one sphere leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in a front view A second wall portion 514 which is disposed at an interval and has a curved plate shape whose surface faces in the left-right direction, and a sphere which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 is A flow-down passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed on the lower left of the shaft support hole 512 in a front view and that is protruded in a columnar shape on the front side, and a lock that is provided around the axis of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device. To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted. The first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517 a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517 b extending downward and to the right in front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 includes a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and a distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which the sphere can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the ball flow passage, and one ball extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a minute gap V1, and a shaft support portion 521c protruding rearward in a columnar shape near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a. And a gap V1 extending along the left side of the sorting projection 521e as viewed from the rear, in a manner that the width is reduced toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower portion from the middle portion is bent downward from the middle portion as compared with the upper portion, and a ball feeding portion in which the front-side thick portion is shaved and thinned at the lower end portion. 521a1.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows a sphere reaching the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in a front view to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 has a plate-like plate-shaped portion 522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate-shaped portion 522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 which is bent rearward at a portion of the lower end portion which is disposed in front of the ball feed portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and since the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a, the falling speed of the sphere can be changed at the middle portion. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the front end portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in a direction opposite to the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the sphere.

  The ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the rear side by the ball feeder 521a1 and the ball receiver 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 meshes with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshes with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521 d of the 520, the eccentric convex portion 542 extends in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541, is configured to be able to abut on the locking wall portion 517, and is able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. And an extension portion 543 that extends.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the second specific winning opening 82 at the right end in a front view of the plate-shaped main body member 551 covered by the base member 510, and the rear end is the first end. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 abutting on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the rear side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The swing operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 in a cross-sectional view at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is illustrated. The external shape is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In a state in which the split convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39B, the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. You.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521 d is moved with the movement of the eccentric convex part 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the release position, the extension 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap between the detection sensors 518 and abuts against the end of the arc wall 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed by the distribution convex portion 521e to a path on the left side as viewed from the front, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the downflow passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (stays on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while the ball is still riding on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), so that the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). From the lower end of the upper side wall 424b. Therefore, when the ball is sent to the connecting member 424 in the downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2, It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In addition, at the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. Accordingly, the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b is stabilized, and the extension portion is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. 543 can be improved in durability.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is sorted by the distribution convex portion 521e into a path on the right side in front view, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. From the upper and lower walls 522b of the passage cover member 522 (see FIG. 37).

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide walls 513 a and 553, moves forward and backward through the gap V <b> 1 of the first passage forming member 520, and moves upward and downward of the passage cover member 522. Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be prevented from jumping and the like and can smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. Further, by causing the ball sent in the front-back direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the speed of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed at an intermediate portion. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and extend from the middle portion to the front end side (opposite to the base end side). Up to a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the ball rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end to the middle portion than from the middle portion to the front end. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is thrown from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42). The angle with respect to the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 swings the first passage forming member 520, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

  Here, when a wall member is disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the ball stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, and a malfunction may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521 e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e, and the second wall portion 514 is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521e shown in the drawing is visible.

  FIGS. 41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31). In FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 illustrates a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is oscillated from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is moved. Rock it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, even if the stop position of the drive side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from an ideal position, for example, the first The generation of a gap between the distal end of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. This suppresses the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and stabilizes the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, the throwing of the ball can be stabilized.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along the downward inclination, and the ball can be stably sent to the second passage forming member 422.

  Note that the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c through a sphere. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of the spheres of the sensor members 82b and 422c match (the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520). The swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) is started at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the ball is distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere by contact is also used (provided by the driving force of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, a situation in which a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area.

  Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end of the distribution base member 521, and partitions (forms the upper end) a wall of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Doubles. Thus, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the distribution is performed by other parts, and the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 can be surely separated from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotating member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitch disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. It mainly includes a device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 611 and 612 forms one surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disk shape having a ring shape in a front view, and is disposed (fixed) at the standing end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thereby, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and has a connecting link operation groove 621 and an undulating link operation groove 622 formed in the front thereof. The connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link of the rotating member 640, which will be described later. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted respectively.

  Note that the groove widths of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is rotationally driven, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link operation groove 622 Acting on the undulating link member 648, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650 and the guide member 680 have been removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that is curved in an arc with a radius R1 about the axis O, and an arc-shaped curve with a radius R2 about the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link action groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a curved in an arc with a radius R3 about the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b curved in an arc with a radius R4 about the axis O, and a large-diameter portion thereof. 622a and a pair of connecting portions 622c connecting between the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link operation groove 622 are concentrically arranged about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. The output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced by suppressing the force.

  In addition, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from one connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. And can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 and the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. Accordingly, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 becomes the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into one of the portions 622b and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the connecting link 644a. It is inserted into one of the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the action groove 621.

  Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval between the divided members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, they receive relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into connection portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the driving mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for driving the rotation of the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a first gear (first transmission gear) attached to the pinion gear 632. 633a), a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The first gear (first distribution gears 635a and 636a) meshes with the first and second distribution gear trains, and the last gear (third distribution gear train) of the one-side distribution gear train and the other gear train. It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are members that are the end of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation driving force generated from the driving motor 631 (the output end of the driving mechanism 630). The motor itself is rotated by the rotational driving force, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) is the one-side rotation member 637 and the other on line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotation member 638.

  Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of positions (three positions in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (a distance between opposing surfaces) from the open side to the recessed inner side. ) Is formed substantially in a V-shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the axial direction). As described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is rotated. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed with a connection wall 637c that partially connects opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) with the center of the axis of the one-side rotation driving member 637 as a center, and at the open side of the engagement portion 637b (the one-side rotation driving member 637). (Outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b on the inner side of the concave portion are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, the engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the center transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitting body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and having a central portion depressed, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the central depressed portion. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude radially outward from the portion in a flange shape.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed at three places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (ie, positions at 120 ° intervals). The extension 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held on the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be regulated by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623, 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the central transmission member 634). Accordingly, since the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a relationship where their arc shapes circumscribe (i.e., point-contact) each other, their contact area is reduced. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhang portion 634 b) of the central transmission member 634 in this manner, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support it, and there is no need for a space for disposing parts for the pivotal support, so that the disposing space for the pitching device 650 described later can be secured accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and illustrates a state where the center transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the drive mechanism 630 has a central transmission member 634 disposed at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission member 634 is provided to the gear 634 a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c, 636c are arranged in a state where they are meshed. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other across the axis O).

  Accordingly, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the rotation is transmitted to the center with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear 635b and 636b. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Is done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In this case, the rotary member 640 can be disposed inward (on the axial center O side) of the outer edge portion. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  When the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are located radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as described later, the position at which the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (engagement position) is maximally separated, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed in postures (rotational positions) where the phases of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is disengaged from the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as described later, transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed from being intermittent, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the rotation member 640 is an annular member in a front view that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and is positioned concentrically with the center transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54B.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly to each other along the circumferential direction. Thereby, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so that the distance between adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV have an interval smaller than the first interval. To form a second section S2 that is connected in the circumferential direction. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). Is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the division member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the division member DV. 56 to 58, the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure between the division members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV have The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed have the same other configuration except for the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, hereinafter, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a rear side main body 642 having the engaged portion 641 disposed on the rear side, and a front side of the rear side main body 642. , A connection link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear body 642 and the front body 643, and a front body 643 disposed on the front side of the front body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 of the driving mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view. The rear body 642 is disposed so as to protrude from the rear surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a is formed facing the rear side of the rear side main body 642 at a predetermined interval, and the opposing portion 641a and the rear side main body are formed. The outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surface facing the second member 642. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the division member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from rising from the front of the guide member 620.

  A pair of columnar sliding rollers 641b is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis perpendicular to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV) and make its outer peripheral surface abut on the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge of the guide member 620. It is arranged in a posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed to protrude from the surface opposite to the surface on which the engaged portion 641 is attached to the rear side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). You.

  The rear side body 642 is a part whose rear surface is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In a state where the rotating member 640 is provided on the guide member 620, the rear side main body 642 is provided in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each of the rear side main body portions 642 is arranged in a radial straight line with the axis O as the center (see FIG. 54).

  The rear side body 642 is provided with a connecting link opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and a front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c formed to support the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (the shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion protruding from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. When the insertion portion 644a is inserted into the connection link opening 642a, the division member is opened. The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. In addition, the connection link member 644 allows the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connection link opening 642a to be inserted into the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the division member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The attitude of the connection link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 is generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulating link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b to a guide member. 620 is inserted through the undulating link action groove 622.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

  When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulating link opening 642b. , The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated.

  As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connection link member 644 is viewed from the front with the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b, 638b of the respective rotation driving members 637, 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is set to be adjacent. To the divided member DV through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d is protruded from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the rear main body 642, and its protruding tip is opposed to the rear surface of the rear main body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the opposing surface of the rear side body 642. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rising of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a manner that its base can contact the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Accordingly, the displacement of the division member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, and thus the main body member DV (the back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the rear-side main body 642, and is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a and a shaft supporting portion 643b formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between a back side main body 642 (a shaft supporting portion 642c). And a support plate 643c protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the partition plate 647.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably provided, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the up / down link member 648 is slid along the up / down link slide groove 643a, so that the insertion portion 648a slides along the up / down link opening 642b.

  In the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643, the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension on one side in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. That is, the rotation member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner periphery side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer periphery side. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 are circumferentially brought into contact with the adjacent rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and its base end is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion at the distal end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the rear body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV. Through the working groove 621.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. This can suppress the variation in the position of the detected portion 641c, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

  The base end side of the connecting link member 644 rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) is connected to the connecting link opening 642a. Is also provided at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (view in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engagement portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 is performed. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the up / down link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the up / down link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by slidingly moving the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display panel 646 is slidably inserted between opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape as viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connection shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an operation groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. And a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the affected part 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the affected part 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as a center of rotation.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in a front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connection shaft 646c of the display panel 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously provided in a circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has a red color. Alternatively, black numbers are added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In this embodiment, one display panel 646 is colored green and has a predetermined mark (star shape). Further, only the display plate 646 of the rotating member 640 located in the first section S1 is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side thereof, and is made invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support 645a that rotatably supports the shaft 646b of the display plate 646 and a shaft support 645b that rotatably supports the shaft 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state where it is disposed in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division | segmentation member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for easy understanding, and the illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other longitudinal side of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axis O side), As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is placed in the horizontal position, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is placed in the upright position.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV), and the standing posture is a plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the rear surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is connected to the large diameter portion 622a of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted through. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642 and the front body 643 (that is, the outer periphery of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). Thereby, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal position to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647, and is disposed in the inclined position, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the upright position. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a, and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted up and the plate 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal position and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright position, the rotation action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) by its own weight is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, the display portion 646 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the display plate 646 is tilted downward, so that a horizontal posture can be formed and the rotation of the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the attachment of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and promptly formed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the length of the display plate 646 that the plate portion 646a projects from the shaft portion 646b is set to be larger than the length of the partition plate 647 that the plate portion 647a projects from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display panel 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is housed in a central depression of the central transmission member 634 of the driving mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching apparatus 650. FIG. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651, and illustration of the passage member 655 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotating mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece projecting / retracting. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed of a translucent material into a sphere.

  The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b standing upright from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer portion from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed so as to protrude in a flange shape toward the front, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, so that the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Are disposed substantially at the front of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is provided in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front surface of the ball holding portion 652, and the depression is set as a holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is placed on the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowest position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved to the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface of 651b (inner passage 651c1) rolls and is held on holding piece 677 at the projecting position of holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the holding position. FIG. 65 is a view in which the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the separated position. FIG. 17 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a folded state. 64 and 65 show a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 has been removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664 are provided. .

  Shafts 661a and 661b protrude from the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a, and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a meshed with the pinion gear 676 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is protruded at a position eccentric from the rotation center (the shaft 661a). A sliding groove 664a into which the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted extends linearly in the arm member 664, and a rotation center (shaft 661b) is formed with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into halves is formed.

  Accordingly, the drive motor 665 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction about the shaft 661b as a rotation center.

  That is, the arm member 664 has a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the ball B on the ball holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b along the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652, and a ball holding portion for holding the bending portion 664b. The ball B can be rotated (oscillated) between the ball holding portion 652 and the separated position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B drops from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on a side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and has a distal end side. Is held upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the rear side (outer peripheral surface side) of the optical disc.

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is located at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c about the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center, If the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is set in the posture in which it is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding unit 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the concave portion of the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the sphere holding portion 652 are formed to have such a size that the sphere B can be displaced when the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input by the player being hit or shaken by the pachinko machine 10, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIGS. 61 and 62, the description will be continued. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (the inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall 651b, and the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It is held on the holding piece 677 at the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 is able to protrude and retract between the protruding position and the retracted position, and when the retaining piece 677 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B is moved to the plurality of rotating members 640. Is thrown on any one of the divided members DV (display panel 646). Here, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position. FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a holding view taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the one-side retracting mechanism 670. FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69B is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69A. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall 651 b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall 651 a of the case body 651. Rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A drive motor 675 for driving the 673 and a pinion gear 676, and a holding piece 677 that appears and disappears as the slide member 673 slides.

  The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 between the sets of roller members 674 so as to be slidable. The rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above, which is formed so as to protrude from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. The sliding displacement (projection to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) and the lower surface of the holding piece 677.

  A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b on which the pinion gear 676 meshes is provided on the inner peripheral surface at the other end (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along. Further, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extends in the holding piece 677 in a substantially Z-shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has one end (the right side in FIG. 66) offset from the other end (the left side in FIG. 66) toward the front side.

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated, thereby causing the slide member 673 to slide and displace via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or immersed to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slid and displaced between a protruding position (see FIG. 68) protruding toward the front side and an immersing position (see FIG. 69) immersing toward the rear side.

  Here, on the upper surface of the holding piece 677, the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1) is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). A curved surface 677b curved concentrically with the inner peripheral passage 651c1 and smoothly connected in the circumferential direction to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, and connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). And a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the inclined surface 677c and which is inclined downward toward the front side.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 falls down from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1, thereby bending the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (the left side in FIG. 68 (b)) is regulated by the rising slope of the rising slope 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is sunk to the rear side from the protruding position and is arranged at the sunk position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 faces the rear side (FIG. 69B ) The ball B whose movement is restricted to the right) is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d after climbing over the ascending inclined surface 677c with the displacement of the holding piece 677 in the immersion direction (back side). Thus, the ball B can be rolled along the descending slope of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown toward the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  Since the curved surface 677b has both sides in the circumferential direction smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, the ball B dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one inner circumferential passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner circumferential passage 651c1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Also, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the ball B is lost and the rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be done.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is provided on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion into the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided by the dividing member DV (display) of the rotating member 640. The ball 646) has a throwing path 655a serving as a path when the ball is thrown up, and a return path 655b serving as a path when returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The throwing path 655a has a groove 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section and having a width substantially equal to that of the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side. A front portion 655a2 connected to the side edge portion and substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and a front portion 655a2 standing from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as that of the partition plate 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B rolled on the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the division member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the split member DV. The ball B thus formed can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the division member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) where the partition plate 647 of the division member DV matches the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface for rolling the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the downstream side when the ball B is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is formed to be upright and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the ball B toward the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 has the upstream side arranged on the inner peripheral edge of the rotating member 640 and the downstream side arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. The rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and to be inclined downwardly toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

  The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is moved radially by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out to the upstream side and is fed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled downstream by the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. You.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower part of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, the guide member 680). The ball B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. , And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in an arc shape in a front view), and a guide surface 681a is formed on an inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, it is arranged on the division member DV of the rotating member 640, and supports the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 from below.

  A return guide 681b is formed on the inner peripheral surface side of the base 681, and is connected to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681a and a radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. Sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even when the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is not rotated. The ball B can be dropped into the return path 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, the ball B is conveyed upward before the ball B starts rolling by its own weight, so that the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high and the ball B Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the moment when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the falling position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. The ball is sent to the return passage 655b while being sent, so that the speed of the ball can be reduced. As a result, breakage of the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the ball B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing path 655a (front portion 655a2). This can prevent the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front part 655a2 of the ball-sending passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (the Since it is formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction), the ramp of the ball B thrown from the throwing path 655a can The ball B can be easily converged, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmitting plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that can face the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV, and the divided member DV on which the ball is thrown. And it does not face the divided member DV located downstream from the adjacent divided member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction of the ball B (the right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the transport of the ball B can be visually recognized by the player. Can be easier.

  In addition, since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, it is possible for a player to see through the member and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing path 655a, falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and rotates by the rotation of the rotating member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. A series of transported modes can be visually recognized by the player.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is formed by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. It is maintained in a posture raised upward (inward in the radial direction).

  In a posture in which the other end in the circumferential direction of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down around the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the ball throwing device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is reduced to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. And the limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact type sensor in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other. Are disposed on the movement locus of the detection portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) divided members DV that are adjacent in the circumferential direction can be respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotating member 640 is moved by a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). Each time the rotation is performed by the amount corresponding to the rotation amount), the divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

  In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV are The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light reception of the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV on which the detected portion 641c is not formed is arranged to receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the respective detection sensors 684, as described later.

  In the present embodiment, six (ON / OFF) detection results based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so that 64 (= 2 to the sixth power) is obtained. Different combinations can be formed. In this case, the number of the divided members DV is 30. Therefore, as described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotating unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a part of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the rear side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member formed to be rotatable around the axis O as a rotation center (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and includes a plurality of divided members DV. Are connected in the circumferential direction to form an endless shape. That is, in each of the divided members DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is on the back side of the adjacent divided member DV. It is inserted into the connection link action groove 621 through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the rear side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture of the guide member 620 with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction of the back side body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated about the axis O). (A linear posture). That is, only movement in a state where the posture is maintained is allowed.

  In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the rotatably supported side) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642. As a result, the back-side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be made a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the connection link member 644 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642, and The side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be made a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, an effect is performed by allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to ensure a variation in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (the identification information Type) is preferably large.

  In this case, considering the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. When the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) is increased while increasing the diameter of the rotating member 640, the rotating member 640 is not accommodated in a predetermined arrangement space, but is rotated so as to fit in a predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display boards 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to secure a variation in the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first section S1 having the interval smaller than the first interval in the first section S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 is formed while the rotating section 640 can be formed with the second section S2 in which the division member DV is circumferentially connected at intervals of 2. The display is made visible to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, compared with the case where all of the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) can be increased while the display of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) has a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is disposed in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the division member DV) in the first section S1. The identification information displayed at 646 can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display panel 646 is higher than the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with the DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is connected to the adjacent divided member DV (plate holding member). The member 645) can be lifted above the upper surface (that is, a position where no interference occurs) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the dividing member DV can be brought close to the position where the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be further reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 74A to 74D are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and illustrate the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Also, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated by using FIG.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, only the driving operation by the one-side rotation driving member 637 is described, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotation driving member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotation driving member 637 has a movement locus of the engagement portion 637b partially corresponding to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, it is rotatable in a state where the engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. Note that the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement between the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 necessary for rotating the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotating torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive of the rotating member 640 (particularly, the rotational drive from a stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the driving mechanism 630 includes one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, so that the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most distant portions of the rotation member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is reduced. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620. , The second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side The rotation driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Thereby, the driving force can be applied to the divided member DV in a state where the distance between the adjacent divided member DV is changed from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since such a divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 to which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction). The division member DV which receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, so that the plurality of division members DV are endless. Can be stably displaced (rotated).

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period when the division member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary that the former period in which the driving force is transmitted and the latter period in the third state at least partially overlap.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622 are formed at positions where the phases are different. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 provided in the divided member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 622a or the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, a reaction force is not received at the same time from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and accordingly, the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, so that the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the division member DV and the phase. In FIG. 75, the upper-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. Is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation driving member 637 moves the first rotation drive member 637 until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until the phase rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV, while the engagement is released when the phase is approximately from 100 ° to 120 °. And the transmission of the driving force to the divided member DV is released.

  After that, the second engagement portion 637b and the third engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engagement portion 637b. The same state of engagement and disengagement (that is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation driving member 638, the engagement portions 638 b formed at the three positions are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the above-described one-side rotation driving member 637. (That is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). You. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. The phase is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  Thus, while one of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged from the division member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged. The phase (rotational position) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b is set such that the other one of the rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the division member DV. Thus, it is possible to avoid a state in which the engagement with the division member DV is simultaneously released from both the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. As a result, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be suppressed, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV tends to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the entire rotating member 640 becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is in the release state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can always be transmitted, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol of “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is represented by a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,. , The detection sensor F, and the divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A thirtieth divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV switches to the sixth position. The division members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors BF.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detected portions 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Then, while the detection state is turned off, the detection sensor B can receive light emitted from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV moves in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). (To the left), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (the detected parts 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. You.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to sixth division members DV and the eighth division member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection state is changed. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of division members DV (this embodiment). When the rotation is repeated 30 times (that is, the rotation member 640 is rotated once), the state returns to the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detection target portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined manner so as to be unequally spaced in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement refers to a combination of the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A), regardless of which of the six divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction is taken out of the six adjacent divided members DV.検 出 F) means sequences in which all combinations are different.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of the detection) is created in advance, and stored in the ROM. The phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be ascertained by referring to the table each time AF detects. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, a slit continuous in the circumferential direction is provided on the rotating member 640, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotation member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse number, and the phase of the rotating member 640 becomes accurate. Cannot be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects subsequent detection results, and each time a detection failure occurs, the effect on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected parts 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detected parts 641c Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) are provided on the trajectory, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the detection sensors A to F. Is not required, so that even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, the detection failure does not affect the detection, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, it is possible to detect the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 using the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, any pocket of the rotatable member 640 simulating roulette). be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set based on the interval of the division members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided by the division members DV in the first section S1). Is located at a position where the detected portion 641c can be detected), as compared with the case where the interval between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference, the space required for disposing the detection sensors A to F. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detection target 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for disposing these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in reducing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not restricted, and the second sensor S is not limited to the second section S2. The interval of 2 can be narrower. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results based on the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively. 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, five detection sensors 684 are sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the fifth power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore, at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. However, the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (the state in which the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (light is blocked by the detection target 641), so that all the phases (rotation) At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (see FIGS. 57 and 58). (See FIG. 77, left side) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that a side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the display panel 646 is arranged in a horizontal position by rotating the plate 646a about the shaft 646b, the side opposite to the shaft 646b of the plate 646a faces the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the distance between the side of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (the arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645.

  Thereby, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to reduce the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is closed. Such a relative displacement can be restricted by contacting the side surface with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to reduce the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (See FIG. 73 (a)), so that when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to increase their interval (first interval), When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 abuts on the end of the connection link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open is described. However, the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the passage. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the right rear of the first wall portion 513 in a front view, a direction in which the distribution base member 2521 extends, and a length of the elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage-forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially straight, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage-forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a side downflow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea is the same, and therefore, the description is omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that forms one side of the ball flow passage, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. A second distribution convex portion 521e disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side in frontal view of the front side, and a rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

  At the lower end, the hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (the left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed. A shaft support hole 2521a3 which is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the side opposite to the hole 2522a.

  The concave portion 2521a2 is a concave portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the concave portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the concave portion 2521a by the rotation operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body 2561a of the distal end wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. You.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge concave portion 2521h is provided with a space larger than the diameter of a sphere provided between the discharge concave portion 2521h and the first wall portion 513, and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge concave portion 2521h into the side downflow passage 2515, and then discharged outside the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate portion 2522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate portion 2522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 2522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described in the first embodiment and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed at the lower end portion in a circular shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the distal end wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with recesses 2522b1 that are recessed at positions facing the recessed portions 2521a2 and that together with the recessed portions 2521a2 form an opening through which a ball can pass.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates as a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape as viewed from the front, which is rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2562 for urging the main body member 2561 clockwise as viewed from the front.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding rearward from the distal end wall member 2560.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 will be described. FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79B. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( FIG. 79 (d) illustrates a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 81).

  As shown in FIG. 79, a main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported with the shaft supporting holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. Plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere, and a body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b on the opposite side. A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from an end of the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin protruding at the tip end of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with respect to the main body portion 2561a, and configured to have a shape smaller than the opening at the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Mainly it comprises a by-inclusive section 2561f, a.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension of the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80). You. Thereby, the rotation stop position of tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to the position where plate portion 2561b and upper wall portion of upper and lower wall portion 2522b abut. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the sphere to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the sphere flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is moved by a rolling wall disposed behind the contact wall 2561d1. Rolling over 2561d2 has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, and FIG. FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an outline at a middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. And stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow passage 2515. This allows the ball to flow down the side downflow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. This prevents the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 when the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  In the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next incoming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next ball can be kept outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution projection 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80).

  The sphere fixed to the outside (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g rotates the first passage forming member 2520 clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being disposed at a position along the right wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g, and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. You. Thus, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, only one ball can be introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position, the first passage forming member 2520 moves from the base end (the left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (the right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, and reaches the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from dropping from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. The rider gets on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first path forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the distal end. For this reason, if the opening at the distal end is always open, the ball is left between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 (see FIG. 78). May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught by another unit (such as the rotating unit 600 (see FIG. 5)), which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid for the opening. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the left of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. Is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Down along.

  At the connection position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts against the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving slide member 420 (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) protruding outside the first passage forming member 2520. That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used also as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

  At this time, at the connection position, the tip end wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a plane position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the sphere reaching the tip end of the first passage forming member 2520 can be smoothly moved. The ball can be sent to the downflow hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive side slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d serves to stop the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and to guide the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the downflow hole 2561c. , Is also used.

  Note that, at the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is in surface position with the lower walls of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that before reaching the connection position. , The plate portion 2561b enters the inside (upper side in FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the downflow hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (a state where the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d until the connection position is reached).

  Accordingly, even if the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connected position to the release position in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. It can be reliably prevented from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case where a plurality of balls are sent to the first passage forming member 2520 in a row will be described. FIGS. 83A to 83C are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the sphere passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed. FIG. 83 (b) shows a state where the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position. In FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the distal end wall member 2560 is partitioned. FIG.

  In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere that flows down to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the pushing portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and has a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side in FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contact position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts rotating by the urging force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is referred to as a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d1, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, so that the flowing ball P21 does not stop flowing down by the contact wall 2561d1 and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw balls.

  In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)). The upper walls of the upper and lower walls 2522b are opposed to each other in the moving direction of the curved wall 2561d. Since the feed ball P21 is pushed in by its wall, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the downflow hole 2561c. Thus, the diameter of the opening of the flow-down hole 2561c can be suppressed to approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the sphere flowing down the flow-down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall 2561d is Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 partitions off). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or reducing the speed near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven slide member 430 has been described. However, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment has the third symbol display. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevating operation of the driving-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 3430 in chronological order. 84 to 88, the right and left members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 and the upper control member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows a state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 abuts on the driven side slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive side slide member 420 is moved down from the state shown in FIG. 85 and is arranged in the lowered position. 86, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the lift control member 417 are in contact with each other. FIG. 88 illustrates a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state illustrated in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a driving side sliding member 420, a driven side sliding member 3430, a driving device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front side. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and that operates in a manner to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  In the base member 410, the lowering control member 415 and the raising control member 417 are provided only on the left side in the front view, and the installation on the right side in the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric leftward in front view from the left-right center position and is configured to be long in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. Functional portions 432 disposed at both ends, guide holes 433 which are vertically formed in the functional portions 432 and through which guide rods 451 are inserted, and rise in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the functional portions 432 A hook-shaped portion 434 extending inclining, a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the rear side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433), Mainly equipped.

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking projection 3431a that is provided at the upper end thereof so as to protrude leftward in front view. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as the upper surface thereof approaches the front end in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 which can be protruded and retracted rightward in a front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward toward the front end in the projecting direction. Note that the solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized, and is in an extended state when not energized, and in this extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center side beyond the tip of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged to the left in front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the area divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 is gathered at one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring as a large area, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed closer to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to incline the attitude of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a wiring housing member 423 is provided at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the gravity center position G31 of the wiring housing member 423 is located to the left from the center position of the driving slide member 420. The slide member 420 may receive a load and may be inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the play side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the elevating operation. The rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in front view can be limited (driving slide). The member 420 and the rack 452 can be prevented from tilting clockwise as viewed from the front from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the descent regulating member 415 and the elevation regulating member 417 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front guide the elevation operation of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452. I do. On the other hand, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right in front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering and lowering control members 415 and 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right in front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. To the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction of inclining the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view increases, and there is a possibility that the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is abutted on the lowering regulating member 415 and supported. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the posture of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from inclining counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without passing electricity through the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive side slide member 420 is lowered in a state where the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is locked by the locking projection 3431a of the driven side slide member 3430. , The driven-side slide member 3430 is prevented from descending in conjunction with the drive-side slide member 420, and the driven-side slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted leftward from the center position as viewed from the front, and the center of gravity is shifted leftward. Also, it is possible to suppress the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may be swung clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 inclines clockwise as viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is located only on the left side, the locking projection 3431a may be displaced from the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side in front view. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking protrusion 3431a is easily inclined in the direction approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking protrusion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is prevented from falling off.

  Accordingly, the driven slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left-right direction of the driven slide member 3430. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is in the immersion state, the driven slide member 3430 falls. In the process of falling of the driven side slide member 3430, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descent regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 may be caught by the descent regulating member 415 and cause malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 is in contact with the separation inclined portion 417 f of the rise regulating member 417, thereby rotating the rise regulating member 417 in an outer winding (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 87) ( Release state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation regulating member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engagement claw 417e of the elevation regulating member 417, The hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state by the rotation of the ascending restricting member 417 with respect to the hook-shaped part 434 of the driven slide member 3430, so that the posture does not change. The amount of load and posture change required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state is increased as compared with the case where the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by elasticity of the member. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the elevation regulating member 417 are engaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the falling-down of the driven-side slide member 3430 causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving device to form the engagement state of the elevation regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the opposing wall portion 422f2 protrudes from the lower end portion of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 at the lower inclined position has been described. However, the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment has a curved shape. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to oppose the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending vertically. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 89 (a)). Also, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate a downward inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates an upward inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extension claw 4424f that extends rightward in a front view from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b.

  The extension claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is depressed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved, as shown in FIG. (B) Right and left direction) A pair of concave portions is provided in the middle part.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall 4422f2 that is disposed to oppose the curved wall 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c. In this state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extension claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there is no portion (projection or the like) that is broken by the collision of the ball with the path of the ball, so that the first passage forming member is provided. When the ball is sent from 520 to the connection member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be suppressed from being clogged near the sensor member 422c.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the detailed description of the light emitting unit 800 disposed on the game board 13 is omitted, but in the fifth embodiment, the light emitting unit 800 will be described in detail. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the light-emitting unit 800 is disposed on the right side of the inner edge of the opening that opens in the center of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front, and is visible to the player via the glass unit 16 ( (See FIG. 2).

  First, the configuration of the light emitting unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90A is a front view of a light emitting unit 800 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 90B is a rear view of the light emitting unit 800. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective front view of the light emitting unit 800, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective rear view of the light emitting unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the light emitting unit 800 includes a partition member 840, a first light guide member 810 and a second light guide member 820 disposed on the partition member 840, and a second light guide member 820. And a partition member 840 on the opposite side of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. It mainly includes a substrate member 850 having an LED 852 that irradiates light to the light guide member 820 side, and a decoration member 860 disposed below the partition member 840 and sandwiching the substrate member 850 between the partition member 840 and the opposite side. It is formed.

  The partition member 840 is formed of a flexible material having a color scheme (black in the present embodiment) that does not easily transmit light, is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a top view, and has a lower surface side (see FIG. One side is formed as an open box. The partitioning member 840 includes a first opening 841 and a second opening 842 that are formed through a base member 847 that forms one surface on the upper surface side in the thickness direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 90A). A plurality of recesses 843 recessed on the lower surface side (an inner bottom surface formed in a box shape) along the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and stand upright along the first opening 841 and the second opening 843. And a plurality of standing portions 844. The detailed description of the partition member 840 will be described later.

  The first light guide member 810 is formed of a transparent flexible material that can transmit light, and is formed in a plate shape having a fan shape in a front view. The first light guide member 810 has an end surface 811 formed at the end on the partition member 840 side (the lower side in FIG. 90A) and parallel to the upper surface of the base portion 847, and a rear surface (the second light guide member 820 side). (FIG. 90 (a), the back side of the paper) irregularly-reflected portions 813 formed in a series of irregularities, and protruding portions 814 protruding from the rear surface on the end surface 811 side.

  The end face 811 is an end face that allows light emitted from the LEDs 852 of the board member 850 disposed on the lower surface of the partition member 840 (base member 847) to be incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810. Orthogonal.

  A substantially arc-shaped incident surface 812 is provided in the end surface 811 in the light incident direction. Due to the curved shape of the incident surface 812, the traveling direction of the light incident from the end surface 811 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the end surface 811 (the left-right direction in FIG. 90A). The detailed description of the incident surface 812 will be described later.

  The irregular reflection portion 813 is formed by connecting irregularities on a part of the back surface. Thereby, the light of the LED 852 incident from the end face 811 can be irregularly reflected by the irregular reflection section 813. Therefore, the light reflected by the irregular reflection portion 813 can be irradiated to the player side.

  Note that the irregular reflection portion 813 in the present embodiment is formed in a shape imitating the numeral “7”, and is formed in a shape in which three of the numeral “7” are juxtaposed in a laterally overlapping manner. You. Therefore, by causing the light of the LED 852 to enter the first light guide member 810, the first light guide member 810 can emit “777”.

  The protruding portion 814 is formed on the end face 811 side (the lower side in FIG. 90A) of the first light guide member 810 at a position separated from the end face 811 by a predetermined distance. The protrusion 814 is a fastening plate for fastening and fixing the first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840. The protrusion 814 is formed in a state where the lower surface of the protrusion 814 and the upper surface of the partition member 840 are in contact with each other. The first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840 are fastened to a fastening hole 845 formed in the partition member 840 in a circular shape through a through hole 814a formed vertically through the first light guide member 810 and the partition member 840. Can be fastened and fixed.

  The second light guide member 820 is formed of a transparent flexible material that can transmit light, and is disposed on the back side of the first light guide member 810 (on the back side of FIG. 90A). That is, the second light guide member 820 is disposed so as to overlap the first light guide member 810 in the plate thickness direction, and allows the player to visually recognize the second light guide member 820 via the first light guide member 810. Can be.

  The second light guide member 820 has an end face 821 formed in a straight line parallel to the upper surface of the base portion 847 at the end on the partition member 840 side (the upper surface of the base portion 847 at the end on the lower side in FIG. 90A). And a diffusely reflecting portion 823 formed by connecting irregularities on the back surface (the back side of the paper in FIG. 90A), and a protruding portion 824 projecting from the back surface on the end surface 821 side to the back surface.

  The end surface 821 is a surface on which light emitted from the LED 852 of the board member 850 disposed on the lower surface of the partition member 840 (base member 847) is incident on the inside of the second light guide member 820. Orthogonal.

  Similarly to the first light guide member 810, an incident surface 823 that is recessed in a substantially arc shape in the light incident direction is formed on the end surface 821. Due to the curved shape of the incident surface 823, the traveling direction of the light incident from the end surface 821 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the end surface 821 (the left-right direction in FIG. 90A). The detailed description of the incident surface 823 will be described later.

  The outer shape of the second light guide member 820 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the first light guide member 810, and the end face 811 of the first light guide member 810 and the end face 821 of the second light guide member 820 are formed. Are set at the same height position (the vertical position in FIG. 90A). This allows the player to visually recognize both end surfaces and the upper surface of the second light guide member 820 in the extending direction without passing through the first light guide member 810 (see FIG. 2).

  The irregular reflection part 823 is formed by connecting irregularities on a part of the back surface. Thus, the light of the LED 852 incident from the end face 821 can be irregularly reflected by the irregular reflection section 822. Therefore, the light reflected by the irregular reflection section 822 can be irradiated to the player side.

  The diffuse reflection portion 822 in the present embodiment is formed in a shape imitating the numeral “7”, similarly to the first embodiment, and is formed in a shape in which three numbers “7” are juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Is done. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the number “777” of the first light guide member 810 and the number “777” of the second light guide member 820 in a state of being overlapped.

  The protruding portion 824 is formed on the end surface 821 side of the second light guide member 820 at a position separated from the end surface 821 by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 824 is a fastening plate for fastening and fixing the second light guide member 820 and the partitioning member 840, and a screw is formed through a through hole 824a formed through the protruding portion 824 in a vertical direction. The second light guide member 820 and the partition member 840 can be fastened and fixed by being fastened to the fastening hole 846 that is formed through the 840 in a circular shape.

  The covering member 830 is formed of a flexible material capable of transmitting light, and is formed to have an outer shape larger by a predetermined amount than the second light guide member 820 in a front view. The covering member 830 is formed of a black transparent material having a smaller light transmittance than the second light guide member 820.

  The covering member 830 mainly includes a wall portion 831 erected on the front side at an outer edge portion in a front view, and a protruding portion 832 protruding from the lower end of the rear surface to the rear side.

  The inner surface of the wall portion 831 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the second light guide member 820 in a front view, and the vertical dimension thereof is set to be substantially the same as the plate thickness of the second light guide member 820. Is done. Accordingly, when the covering member 830 is brought into contact with the back surface of the second light guide member 820, the second light guide member 820 is disposed inside the wall portion 831.

  Here, as described above, the outer shape of the second light guide member 820 is formed larger than that of the first light guide member 810. Therefore, in order to cause the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 to emit light with the same light amount by the LED 852 described later, the second light guide member 820 has more light than the first light guide member 810. Need to be incident.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the covering member 830 is provided on the back side of the second light guiding member 820, it is possible to make it difficult for the light incident on the second light guiding member 820 to escape to the covering member 830 side. . Therefore, the light incident on the second light guide member 820 can be easily emitted to the player side.

  Therefore, when the light of the LED 852 described later is incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 with the same amount of light, the light is transmitted from the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 to the player side. The amount of emitted light can be made equal. As a result, the light amounts of the LEDs 852 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 having different sizes are made the same, and the player side (front side) is connected to the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. The light emission to the side (FIG. 90 (a) forward direction) can be reduced.

  The protruding portion 832 is formed to protrude from the lower edge of the back surface of the covering member 830. The projecting portion 832 is a fastening plate for fastening the covering member 830 to the partitioning member 840. When the second light guide member 820 is in contact with the front surface of the covering member 830, the lower surface of the projecting portion 832 The second light guide member 820 contacts the upper surface of the protrusion 824.

  In the protruding portion 832, a through hole 832a penetrating vertically is formed. Accordingly, when the second light guide member 820 is fastened to the partition member 840, the screw is fastened through the through hole 832a, so that the covering member 830 and the second light guide member 820 are simultaneously attached to the partition member 840. Can be fastened and fixed.

  That is, the through-hole 832 a of the covering member 830, the through-hole 824 a of the second light guide member 820, and the fastening hole 846 of the partition member 840 have their axes formed on the same straight line. The cover member 830 and the second light guide member 820 can be fastened and fixed to the partition member 840 by inserting the through-hole 824a and screwing into the fastening hole 846.

  The board member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from above, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs 852 that can emit light on the side of the partition member 840 (base member 847) (upper side in FIG. 90A). Further, the board member 850 has an outer shape in a top view smaller than the inner shape of the lower opening portion of the partition member 840, and is disposed inside the partition member 840 (below the base member 847). Is done.

  The LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the first opening 842 and the second opening 843, and emits light emitted from the LED 852 via the first opening 842 and the second opening 843 to the first light guide member 810. And the second light guide member 820. A detailed description of the arrangement position of the LED 852 will be described later.

  The decorative member 860 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view and includes a decorative plate 861 standing upright on the front side, and is connected to the lower surface of the partition member 840. The decorative plate 861 is set to a size located in front of the partition member 840. Thus, the board member 850 can be disposed between the partition member 840 and the decoration member 860 facing each other, and the partition member 840 can be made hard to be visually recognized by the player due to the decoration plate 861.

  Next, the partition member 840 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a front view of the partition member 840, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the partition member 840 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIIb in FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. FIG. 93 is a bottom view of the partition member 840 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIIc in FIG. 93 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 93, the partition member 840 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has an end face on one side in the short direction (lower side in FIG. 93 (b)) and the other side in the short direction (FIG. b) The end face on the upper side) is formed parallel to the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the base member 847 forms one surface of the upper surface side (the upper surface side in FIG. 93A) of the partition member 840. Therefore, the base member 847 is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. The base member 847 has a first opening 841, a second opening 842, a concave portion 843, an upright portion 844, and fastening holes 845, 846.

  In addition, the partitioning member 840 has a concave portion 847 that partitions the space between the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 described above with the base member 847 on the lower surface side (FIG. Side).

  The first opening 841 is formed in the partition member 840 (base member 847) so as to extend in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 93 (b)) and to penetrate therethrough. ) It is formed so as to be inclined from the left side) to the other end in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 93 (b)) to one side in the short direction (the lower side in FIG. 93 (b)).

  In the first opening 841, the dimension L1 (see FIG. 93 (b)) between the opposing sides in the short direction inside the opening is set to be larger than the thickness of the first light guide member 810. In the second opening 842, a dimension L2 (see FIG. 93B) between the opposing sides in the lateral direction inside the opening is set to be larger than the thickness of the second light guide member 820.

  The upright portions 844 are edges at both ends of the first opening 841 in the short direction (direction of the distance L1) and edges of both ends of the second opening 842 in the short direction (direction of the distance L2). The partition member 840 (base member 847) stands upright in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 93A) along the portion. The upright portion 844 is a wall portion that sandwiches the first light guide members 810 and 820 between a space between the first light guide members 810 and 820 between a space between the light guide members 810 via the first opening 841 and a space between the space between the light guide members via the second opening 842.

  As described above, each of the facing distance L1 and the facing distance L2 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of each of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and thus the first opening 841 is set. The end face 811 of the first light guide member 810 is inserted and the end face 821 of the second light guide member 820 is inserted into the second opening 842.

  The concave portion 843 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom, and is formed at a position where a part thereof overlaps the first opening 841 or the second opening 842. The concave portion 843 is formed on a straight line at an intermediate position in the lateral direction of the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 (an intermediate position between the facing dimensions L1 and L2). ) The middle position and the middle position in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)) are set. Thus, the concave portion 843 is divided into the same shape on both sides in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)) of the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 and arranged.

  The concave portion 843 has a pair of second side walls 843b formed in a short direction (left and right directions in FIG. 93 (c)) in which one end is connected to the first opening 841 or the second opening 842, and the pair of second side walls. And a first side wall 843a to which the other end of the second side wall 843b is connected.

  The first side wall 843a is formed so that the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 93C) and the extending direction thereof are parallel. The second side wall 843b is formed such that the transverse direction of the partition member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)) and the extending direction thereof are parallel.

  As described above, the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 are formed to be inclined with respect to the end surface of the partition member 840 in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (c)). The side wall 843a is formed to be inclined with respect to the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LED 852 of the substrate member 850 can be easily diffused in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842. A detailed description of the light traveling mode will be described later.

  Next, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (a) is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partially enlarged view of a range XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a).

  94 (a) and 94 (b), the state where the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 94B, the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the lateral direction of the partition member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 94B). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left and right direction in FIG. 94B). Are attached and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 94, an end face 811 of the first light guide member 810 is arranged at an inner edge of the first opening 841, and an end face 821 of the second light guide member 820 is arranged at an inner edge of the second opening 842. You. The LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the incident surface 812 of the end surface 811 and the incident surface 822 of the end surface 821. The center of the light source of the LED 852 is set at a position facing an intermediate position in the plate thickness direction (direction of the virtual line KS3) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the The light guide member 820 is set at a position opposed to an intermediate position of the concave portions 812 and 822 in the direction of the virtual line KS1.

  The connection surfaces (boundaries) of the entrance surfaces 812 and 822 with the end surfaces 811 and 821 are set in parallel with the virtual line KS2 (the short direction of the partition member 840). In addition, the boundary between both ends in the left-right direction is set inside the two second side walls 843b opposed in the left-right direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS4), and set outside in the left-right direction between the LEDs 852 in the optical axis direction. You.

  The recess 843 is formed such that the extending direction of the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b is parallel to the virtual lines KS4 and KS2. That is, the light guide members 810 and 820 are non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front surface (the upper surface in FIG. 94A).

  Here, a light-transmitting member (first light-guiding member 810 and second light-guiding member 820) formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end face of the light-transmitting member are provided. A game machine provided with a game machine is known. A plurality of dots (irregular reflection portions 813 and 823) are formed in the light transmitting member, and light incident from side end surfaces (end surfaces 811 and 821) is reflected by the dots so that light can be emitted from the front. it can.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that light incident on the light transmitting member tends to be biased toward a region along the optical axis of the light irradiating means (LED 852), and the illuminance of the light transmitting member is made uniform. Was difficult. That is, since the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member from the light irradiating unit is concentrated in the direction along the optical axis of the light irradiating unit, the light spreads along the front surface of the light transmitting member (the thickness direction of the light transmitting member). It was difficult for the light to travel in a direction (direction of the virtual line KS1) orthogonal to both the optical axis direction and the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the partition member 840 that partitions the space from the LED 852 to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is provided. Since the inner walls (the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b of the concave portion 843) are non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the LED 852 emits light. The light reflected on the inner walls of the partition member 840 (the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b of the concave portion 843) spreads along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the first light guide direction). It is possible to make it easier to proceed in the direction (virtual line KS1 direction) orthogonal to both the plate thickness direction of the light member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the optical axis direction of the LED 852.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the LED 852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  That is, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are arranged in a direction (in the direction of the imaginary line KS1) inclined with the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843b. The light incident on the second light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the direction in which the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  More specifically, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light directly applied to the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 depends on the curved shape of the incident surface 812 as described later. At the time of incidence, the light is diffused in the direction of the virtual line KS3. Further, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the first side wall 843a is reflected by the first side wall 843a and is irradiated (progresses) to the incident surfaces 812 and 822. Therefore, it is difficult to diffuse in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  Of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 843b is reflected by the second side wall 843b as shown by the arrow H1 in FIG. Do). The light emitted from the second side wall 843b to the first side wall 843a is reflected by the first side wall 843a, so that the light is reflected toward the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820.

  Here, in the conventional second side wall 843b, the extending direction (the imaginary line KS1 direction) of the front surface of the first light guide member 810 (the second light guide member 820) is the longitudinal direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction) of the partition member 840. ). Therefore, the light reflected from the second side wall 843b and the first side wall 843a should have a small incident angle of the incident surface 812 of the first light guide member 810 (second light guide member 820) with respect to the virtual line KS1 direction. Could not. Therefore, it was difficult to diffuse light in the direction in which the first light guide member 810 (the second light guide member 820) extends (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light reflected on the second side wall 843b and the first side wall 843a is spread on the front surface (the upper surface in FIG. 94B) of the first light guide member 810 (the second light guide member 820). Since the setting direction (the direction of the virtual line KS1) is inclined with respect to the partition member 840, the intersection angle between the traveling direction of the arrow H1 and the virtual line KS1 when light enters the end surfaces 811 and 821 is reduced.

  Therefore, the light incident on the end surfaces 811 and 821 can be more easily diffused in the extending direction of the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the imaginary line KS1 direction). As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  The partitioning member 840 has the inner wall (first side wall 843a, second side wall 843b) of the concave portion 843 of the base member 847 partitioning the space from the LED 852 to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guiding member 810 and the second light guiding member 820. Therefore, the light is reflected by the partition member 840 (the inner wall of the concave portion 843), and the light travels in the direction perpendicular to the plate thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the optical axis of the LED 852. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing the deviation of the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. Therefore, product cost can be reduced.

  That is, since only the concave portion 843 is provided in the base member 847 of the partition member 840, a structure for suppressing the bias of the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be formed. Since there is no need to provide another component (for example, a mirror) that suppresses the deviation of the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, it is possible to reduce the product cost for the component. .

  In addition, as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the light emitting unit 800 (in the optical axis direction of the LED 852), the base member 847 and the concave portion 843 are each formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom, and the concave portion 843 is formed on each side (the first side wall 843a, The second side wall 843b) is formed in a posture parallel to each side of the base member 847, and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are disposed in a posture inclined with respect to the concave portion 843. The moldability of the partition member 840 (base member 847) is ensured while allowing the inner wall of the concave portion 843 to be non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. can do.

  That is, when the base member 847 is molded from a resin material, the recesses 843 are disposed in such a manner that each side is parallel to each side of the base member 847 so that the thickness of the base member 847 is made uniform. Accordingly, sink, warpage, poor filling and the like can be suppressed. As a result, moldability can be ensured.

  Further, the connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set in parallel with the virtual line KS2 (the short direction of the partition member 840). The connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set inside the two second side walls 843b opposed in the left-right direction (the direction of the virtual line KS4), and the optical axis of the LED 852. It is located outside between the opposing sides.

  Therefore, the light reflected inside the concave portion 843 can be uniformly incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822. That is, a case where the connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 extends in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the direction of the virtual line KS3). The incidence surfaces 812 and 822 in one (or the other) region of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the plate thickness direction are arranged on one side of the imaginary line KS1 direction with respect to the recess 843. All incident areas are reduced. Therefore, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 cannot be made uniform.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is set in parallel with the virtual line KS2 (the front-back direction of the light emitting unit 800). , 822 can be made uniform. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be made uniform.

  Next, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 in XCVa-XCVa of FIG. 94 (a), and FIG. 95 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light emitting unit 800 in a range XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). is there.

  Note that FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show a state in which the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 have been removed, and the LEDs 852 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 95, a pair is formed with the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 of the concave portion 843 interposed therebetween. The first side wall 843a is formed such that the space between the partitioning members 840 in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 95A) decreases from the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 95B) to the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 95B). Is done. In other words, the first side wall 843a is formed to be inclined upward in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 (the left-right direction in FIG. 95B). In addition, an LED 852 is provided between the opposing lower sides (the lower side in FIG. 95B) of the first side wall 843a.

  Accordingly, a distance between the opposing sides on which the LEDs 852 are provided can be ensured, so that the heat generated by the irradiation of the LEDs 852 with light can suppress the heat accumulation of the first side wall 843a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first side wall 843a from storing heat and the substrate member 850 from being damaged.

  Further, since the first side wall 843a is formed to be inclined, the light emitted from the LED 852 to the first side wall 843a is reflected by the first side wall 843a as shown by an arrow H2 in FIG. 95 (b). In this case, the light can be easily reflected to the end face 811 side of the first light guide member 810.

  Accordingly, even when the thickness of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is reduced with respect to the outer shape of the LED 852, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are formed. Light can be collected on the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the light source.

  That is, when the thickness of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is reduced, it is not necessary to reduce the outer shape of the LED 852. Therefore, when the thickness of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is reduced, the amount of incident light can be ensured.

  Next, the relationship between the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96A is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit 800 along the line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 94A, and FIG. 96B is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting unit 800 in a range XCVIb in FIG. is there.

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show a state in which the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed, and the LED 852 is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the second side wall 843b of the concave portion 843 extends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 96 (b)) from below (FIG. 96 (b) below) to above (FIG. 96 (a) above). The space between the opposing sides (in the left-right direction) is formed small. In addition, an LED 852 is provided between the opposing portions below the second side wall 843b (the lower portion in FIG. 96B).

  Accordingly, a distance between the opposing sides on which the LEDs 852 are provided can be ensured, so that the second sidewall 843b can be prevented from accumulating heat due to the heat of the LEDs 852 irradiating light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second side wall 843b from storing heat and the substrate member 850 from being damaged.

  Further, since the second side wall 844a is formed to be inclined, when the light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 843b is reflected by the second side wall 844b, the incident surface of the first light guide member 810 is formed. 812 can be easily reflected.

  As described above, the LED 852 is disposed at a position facing the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. As a result, as shown by arrows H3 and H4 in FIG. 96 (b), the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are refracted by the light incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822 from the LED 852. Light can be diffused in the extending direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 96B).

  Further, since the incidence surface 812 is formed to be curved in a semicircular shape, the angle of incidence of light on the incidence surface 812 increases from the center in the left-right direction to the outside. Accordingly, of the light that is directly incident on the incident surface 812 from the LED 852, the light incident on both ends of the incident surface 812 in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 (the left-right direction in FIG. 96A) is converted to the first light. The light can be easily diffused in the direction toward the extending direction of the light guide member 810.

  Therefore, the light incident on the end surfaces 811 and 821 can be more easily diffused in the extending direction of the front surfaces of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the imaginary line KS1 direction). As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the first side wall 843a is formed in a straight line parallel to the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the first side wall 6843a is formed to be curved. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97A is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 97A illustrates a state in which the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 have been removed, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 97A, the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the lateral direction of the partitioning member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 97A). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 97A). Are attached and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the concave portion 6843 of the partition member 840 in the sixth embodiment, the second side wall 6843b is formed parallel to the imaginary line KS2, and the first side wall 6843a is connected to the first light guide. It is formed in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the member 810 or the second light guide member 820.

  The first side wall 6843a has an angle θ1 at which the imaginary line KS5 intersecting the imaginary line KS4 intersects the imaginary line KS4 with the imaginary line KS4 connecting the both ends connected to the second side wall 6843b. The angle 810 and the second light guide member 820 are set to be larger than the angle of inclination of the game board 13 (the partition member 840) in the front-rear direction.

  In other words, the length of the second side wall 6843b is different between the left and right sides in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the virtual line KS2 extends), and is different from the front side of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 (see FIG. 97 (a) (upper side) is an end side located on the front side, and the rear side of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 (lower side in FIG. 97 (a)) is facing the end side located on the rear side. It is formed longer than the two side walls 6843b.

  The first side wall 6843a is formed in a curved shape having the same radius. Thereby, the axis of the first side wall 6843a can be arranged at a position different from the center position where the space between the opposing surfaces of the second side wall 6843b of the concave portion 6843 is bisected. That is, the axis of the first side wall 6843a can be located at a different position in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 (direction of the virtual line KS1).

  As a result, the light irradiated on the first side wall 6843a formed on one side (the upper side in FIG. 97A) of the partition member 840 in the short direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS2) is changed to the axial side of the first side wall 6843a. (FIG. 96 (a) right side). On the other hand, the light irradiated on the second side wall 6843 formed on the other side in the short side direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction) of the partition member 840 moves in the axial direction of the first side wall 6843 (the left side in FIG. 96B). Can be reflected.

  Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the first side wall 6843a is transmitted in the direction in which the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1). Can be collected on both sides. Accordingly, light emitted from the LED 852 and incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the direction of the virtual line KS1. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97A, the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are connected (boundary) with the end surfaces 811 and 821. Are set in parallel with the virtual line KS2 (the front-back direction of the light emitting unit 800). Further, the connection (boundary) portion is set inside the two second side walls 843b opposed to each other in the left-right direction (the direction of the virtual line KS4), and is positioned outside the left-right direction between the LEDs 852 in the optical axis direction. You. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 852 and reflected inside the concave portion 843 is made incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are formed. Can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  More specifically, as described above, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the first side wall 6843a is reflected by the first side wall 6843a as indicated by an arrow H5 in FIG. The light is reflected to the first opening 841 or the second opening 842 side.

  In this case, the reflected light can be made to travel to the second side wall 6843b side while being collected by the curved shape of the first side wall 6843a (see the arrow H4 in FIG. 97A). The light can be easily incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822.

  As described above, the incident surfaces 812 and 822 are formed in curved concave surfaces (see FIG. 96 (b)) and can diffuse the light incident on the incident surfaces 812 and 822, so that the light is emitted from the LED 852. Light into the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and is easily diffused in the direction in which the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1). it can.

  In the sixth embodiment, the base member 847 (the partition member 840) is irradiated from the LED 852 because the inner wall (the first side wall 6843a) of the recess 843 is formed as a concave curved surface when viewed in the optical axis direction of the LED 852. By reflecting the light on the concave curved surface, the light can be collected in one direction.

  That is, the direction of light collection is changed in the direction of spreading along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line KS3). Direction) and the optical axis direction of the LED 852 (direction of the imaginary line KS1), respectively, so that light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is It is possible to suppress a bias toward a region along the optical axis. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 843b is formed in a straight line parallel to the virtual line KS2 has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the second side wall 7843b is inclined with respect to the virtual line KS2. It is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 according to the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 97 (b), the state where the decoration member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a chain line. In FIG. 97 (b), the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the short direction of the partition member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 97 (b)). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left and right direction in FIG. 97B). Are attached and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the concave portion 7843 of the partition member 840 in the seventh embodiment, the second side wall 7843b is formed parallel to the imaginary line KS3. In addition, the second side wall 7843b is formed at a position that intersects a virtual line KS2 extending from the emission center of the LED 852.

  That is, the first side wall 843a of the concave portion 7843 in the seventh embodiment is formed in one of the longitudinal directions (the imaginary line KS4 direction) of the partitioning member 840 at the emission center of the LED 852 (extending from the emission center of the LED 852). Is formed in one of the areas defined by the virtual line KS2).

  Thereby, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the concave portion 7843 is made incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the It can be easily diffused in the direction in which the two light guide members 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  To be more specific, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 7843b is reflected by the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 7843b as shown by an arrow H6 in FIG. It is possible to make the state proceed to the one opening 841 or the second opening 842 side, and to be biased to one of the connection (boundary) portions between the pair of incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821.

  As a result, the light emitted from the LED 852 is made incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line). KS1 direction).

  In the seventh embodiment, the first side wall 843a of the concave portion 7843 is formed in one of the longitudinal directions (the imaginary line KS4 direction) of the partitioning member 840 at the light emission center of the LED 852, so that the LED 852 emits light. Of the light, the light irradiated to the concave portion 7843 can be easily irradiated to the second side wall 843a.

  Accordingly, the light emitted from the LED 852 is made to enter the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the virtual line KS1). Direction). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the LED 852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the first side wall 843a is formed parallel to the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, in the eighth embodiment, the first side wall 8843a is formed to be inclined with respect to the virtual line KS1. . The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98A is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 in the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 98 (a), a state where the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 98A, the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the short direction of the partition member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 94B). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 98B). Are attached and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 98A, in the recess 8843 of the partition member 840 in the eighth embodiment, the first side wall 8843a is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS1. That is, the opposing surfaces of the second side wall 843b are formed to have the same length in the front-rear direction (the imaginary line KS2 direction).

  In the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 822 and the end surfaces 811 and 821 is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS3. One end of the connecting portion is set at a position substantially the same as the position of the concave tip of the second side wall 843b.

  Thereby, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the concave portion 8843 is made incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the It can be easily diffused in the direction in which the two light guide members 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  More specifically, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 843b is reflected by the second side wall 843b to be directed to the first side wall 8443a as shown by an arrow H7 in FIG. Irradiated (progress).

  As described above, since the first side wall 8843a is formed in parallel with the virtual line KS1, the light reflected from one of the second side walls 843b (upper right in FIG. 98A) and emitted to the first side wall 8843a is The incident angle with respect to the first side wall 8843a is made larger (than in the fifth embodiment). As a result, the light reflected from the one second side wall 843b is reflected by the first side wall 8843a, and one end of the concave portion of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the left end in FIG. 98A). Part) side.

  Further, the light reflected from the second side wall 843b of the other side (upper left of FIG. 98A) and irradiated to the first side wall 8843a has a smaller incident angle with respect to the first side wall 8843a (than in the fifth embodiment). Is done. Thus, when the light reflected from the other second side wall 843b is reflected by the first side wall 8843a, the light is irradiated to the one second side wall 843b.

  The light reflected on the other second side wall 843b and the first side wall 8843a and applied to the one second side wall 843b is reflected on the one second side wall 843b, and the first light guiding member 810 and the second light guiding member 810. The light is applied to one end (the left end in FIG. 98A) of the concave portion of the optical member 820.

  Accordingly, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 843b is made to enter the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the second It can be easily diffused in the direction in which the light guide member 820 extends (the direction of the virtual line KS1). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the LED 852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  In addition, the incident surfaces 812 and 822 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 extend in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the imaginary line KS3 direction). Therefore, when the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are molded, the removal of the mold can be simplified.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 843b is formed in a straight line has been described. However, in the ninth embodiment, the second side wall 9843b is formed to be curved. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800 according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 98 (b), a state where the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line. In FIG. 98B, the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the short direction of the partition member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 94B). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 98B). Are attached and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the concave portion 9843 of the partition member 840 in the ninth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in which the second side wall 9843b is convex toward the inside of the concave portion 9843.

  In addition, the second side wall 9843b is located at the center in the left-right direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS4) of the concave portion 9843 from the connection side of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 to the connection side of the first side wall 843a. It is formed. That is, the bending axis of the second side wall 9843b is set at a position farther away from the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 in the front-rear direction (the direction of the imaginary line KS2) than the first side wall 843a.

  Thereby, the light irradiated from the LED 852 to the inside of the concave portion 9843 is made incident on the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the The second light guide member 820 can be easily diffused in the extending direction (the virtual line KS2 direction).

  To be more specific, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 9843b is reflected by the second side wall 9843b as shown by an arrow H8 in FIG. The component reflected by the first opening 841 and the second opening 842 and traveling in the left-right direction (the direction of the virtual line KS1) is increased.

  Therefore, the light irradiated on the second side wall 9843b among the light emitted from the LED 852 can be easily diffused in the direction of the virtual line KS4. As a result, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 843b is made to enter the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the It can be easily diffused in the direction in which the two light guide members 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the LED 852. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the base member 847 (the partitioning member 840) emits light from the LED 852 because the inner wall (the second side wall 8843b) of the concave portion 843 is formed as a convex curved surface in the optical axis direction of the LED 852. The reflected light is reflected by the convex curved surface, so that the light can be collected in both directions in which the first light guide member 810 extends (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  That is, the direction of light collection is changed in the direction of spreading along the front of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (virtual line KS3). Direction) and the optical axis direction of the LED 852 (direction of the imaginary line KS1), respectively, so that light incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is It is possible to suppress a bias toward a region along the optical axis. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where a plurality of recesses 843 having the same shape are formed has been described. However, in the tenth embodiment, a recess 843 and a second recess 10843 having a different shape from the recess 843 are formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 99A is a sectional view of the light emitting unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 99B is a bottom view of the light emitting unit 800. In FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the state where the decorative member 860 and the substrate member 850 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 852 is illustrated by a broken line.

  In FIG. 99B, the sign of the imaginary line KS1 is set in the extending direction of the first opening 841 and the second opening 842, and the imaginary line KS2 is set in the short direction of the partition member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 99B). The sign of the imaginary line KS3 in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 and the sign of the imaginary line KS4 in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 99B). Are attached and shown.

  Further, in FIG. 99 (a), virtual lines along the emission direction of each LED 852 are shown, and the first area is divided into left and right sides (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) in respective areas partitioned by the virtual lines. It is illustrated with reference numerals from SR1 to the fifth region SR5.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the light emitting unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment, a concave portion 843 is formed at the center side of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (FIG. 99 (b) left-right direction), and the left-right direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 99). (B) Left and right direction) Second concave portions 10843 are formed at both ends.

  The second concave portion 10843 is formed in a curved shape in which the first side wall 10843a is convex in the thickness direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (direction of the virtual line KS3). The pair of second side walls 843b is such that the outer portion of the partition member 840 in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99B) is shorter than the inner portion in the lateral direction of the partition member 840 (FIG. 99B). Direction).

  Therefore, as described in the sixth embodiment, by forming the first side wall 10843a in a curved shape, light emitted from the LED 852 can be directed in the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. The light can be collected on one side (in the direction of the virtual line KS1). Here, in the tenth embodiment, the first side wall 10843a is arranged such that the line in the direction of the imaginary line KS4 passing through the irradiation center of the LED 852 disposed opposite to the second concave portion 10843 is symmetrical to the short side of the partition member 840. A pair is formed in the hand direction. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 852 can be focused on only one side in the left-right direction.

  In the tenth embodiment, the second recess 10843 formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the left side in FIG. 99B) focuses the light of the LED 852 on the first region SR1 side. On the other hand, the first concave portion 10843 formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the partition member 840 (the right side in FIG. 99B) focuses the light of the LED 852 on the fifth region SR5 side.

  Here, as described above, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 are formed in a fan shape when viewed from the front, and the irradiation surface that emits light toward the player is larger than the end surfaces 811 and 821. Is done. Therefore, when the LEDs 852 are arranged at equal intervals along the extending direction of the end surfaces 811 and 821, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 have the left and right ends (the left and right directions in FIG. 99A). There was a possibility that light could be light and dark between the center and the center.

  That is, in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, the irradiation region of the left end first region SR1 and the right end fifth region SR5 is larger than the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4. Is done. Therefore, the light emission of the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5 is weakened from the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4. Therefore, it is difficult to secure the illuminance.

  Further, in the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5, only light emitted from the LEDs 852 disposed at the left and right ends is incident, whereas in the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4, the left and right regions are left and right. Light of two LEDs 852 emitted from two LEDs 852 adjacent in the direction is incident.

  That is, in the region between the concave portions 843, light travels from each of the adjacent concave portions 843 (that is, the light from the two LEDs 852 reaches), so that the light overlaps and the illuminance is easily secured. On the other hand, in a region outside the second concave portion 10843 located at the end on one side or the other side in the arrangement direction, only light from the second concave portion 10843 proceeds (that is, only light from one LED 852). Is reached), it is difficult to secure the illuminance.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the second concave portion 10843 located at one end in the row direction and the second concave portion 10843 located at the other end in the row direction are formed by the first side surfaces 10843a. Is arranged in such a manner that the curved surface faces outward in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (b)) of the partition member 840, so that the condensed light travels toward a region outside each of the concave portions 843. And illuminance can be secured. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.

  In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the second concave portion 10843 is formed at the outer end of the partition member 840 in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99B), so that the light emitted from the LED 852 can be transmitted to the first guide. The light can be condensed outside the extending direction of the light member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (direction of the virtual line KS1). Therefore, light can be easily emitted from the end portions of the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5. Therefore, the light emission of the first region SR1 to the fifth region SR5 (the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820) can be easily made uniform. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the detailed description of the elevating body 330 is omitted in the first embodiment, the elevating body 330 is described in detail in the eleventh embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 (a) is a front view of the elevating body 330 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 100 (b) is a rear view of the elevating body 330. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the elevating body 330.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a description will be given with reference to the second lifting / lowering body 330 from one side (the left side in FIG. 12) of the four arranged in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12) of the base member 310. .

  As shown in FIG. 100 to FIG. 102, the elevating body 330 is arranged vertically in a disc-shaped effect portion 331 and at a position fixed to the rear surface of the effect portion 331 and spaced apart from the rear surface of the effect portion 331. And an extended rack 332.

  The rendering unit 331 includes an outer frame 360 formed in a ring shape, a lens unit 370 provided inside the outer frame 360, and a plurality of first LEDs 391 provided on the back side of the lens unit 370. It is mainly provided with the provided substrate member 390 and a partition member 380 interposed between the substrate member 390 and the lens portion 370 and partitioning the light of the plurality of first LEDs 391. In the following description, the lens member 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 are collectively referred to as an interposition member 335.

  The outer frame 360 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer edge 361 erected from the outer edge on the back side (interposed member 335 side) and a position radially separated from the inner edge by a predetermined distance. A bulging portion 362 bulging to the rear side and a protrusion 363 protruding to the inner edge side of the bulging portion 362 are provided.

  The outer frame 360 is resin-molded from a transparent light-transmitting material, and a part of the front side is partially painted. Thereby, the light of the second LED 392 disposed on the back side can be emitted from the unpainted portion to the player side.

  In the outer frame 360, the inner diameter of the inner edge portion is set smaller than the outer diameter of the lens portion 370 described later, and the outer diameter of the outer edge portion is set larger than the outer diameter of the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 described later. .

  The outer edge portion 361 has a vertical dimension from the front side (front side in FIG. 100A) to the rear side (back side in FIG. 100B), and is a combination of a lens portion 370 and a partition member 380 described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the plate thickness dimension in the front-rear direction in the state (see FIG. 103). Further, a holding portion 361a that partially projects is formed below the outer edge portion 361. The holding portion 361a is formed to protrude at a position facing a base portion 334 described later.

  The lens portion 370 is formed in a disk shape, and is disposed at a position coaxial with the outer frame 360 in an assembled state. The lens portion 370 includes an upright portion 371 erected on the back side at the outer edge, an engaging portion 372 projecting from the outer edge, and a fastening portion 373 projecting from the lower surface. Further, the lens part 370 is resin-molded from a translucent transparent material.

  The erected portion 371 is erected with a predetermined thickness from the outer edge portion of the lens portion 370 to the rear side (rear side in FIG. 100A). The inner diameter of the inner edge of the upright portion 371 is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a partition member 380 described later. As a result, in the assembled state, the partition member 380 is arranged with the partition member 380 inserted inside the upright portion 371 (see FIG. 103).

  The outer diameter of the lens portion 370 is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bulging portion 361 of the outer frame 360. Thereby, the lens portion 370 can be disposed inside (the inner edge side) of the bulging portion 361, and the lens portion 370 is located forward of the outer frame 360 by the inner rim portion (the inner portion of the bulging portion 361) of the outer frame 360. Can be restricted. In addition, since the lens unit 370 is disposed inside the bulging portion 361, the lens unit 370 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the outer frame 360.

  The engagement portion 372 is a pair of protrusions 372a protruding from the outer edge of the lens portion 370. The pair of protrusions 372a are formed with a gap larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360. Further, the engaging portion 372 is formed at a position facing the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the projection 363 of the outer frame 360 is inserted and engaged between the pair of projections 372a of the engagement portion 372 so as to face each other.

  Thus, in the assembled state in which the lens portion 370 is disposed inside the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360, the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 can be disposed inside the pair of protrusions 372a. Therefore, the rotation of the lens unit 370 in the circumferential direction with respect to the outer frame 360 can be suppressed. The detailed description of the engagement between the engagement portion 372 and the projection 363 will be described later.

  The fastening portion 373 is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the lens portion 370, and the protrusion of the lens portion 370 from the axis is set smaller than the inner diameter of the outer edge portion 361 of the outer frame 360. Thus, in the assembled state, the fastening portion 373 is placed inside the outer edge 361 of the outer frame 360.

  The partitioning member 380 is formed in a disk shape coaxial with the lens portion 370, and has a regulating plate 381 radially projecting from an outer edge portion on the back side, and a hook-like portion projecting in a hook shape from the outer edge of the regulating plate 381. 382, a plurality of openings 383 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a columnar protrusion 384 protruding to the rear side.

  The outer diameter of the partition member 380 is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the upright portion 371 of the lens portion 370. Thus, the partition member 380 can be inserted and disposed inside the upright portion 371. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the partition member 380 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the lens member 370.

  The restriction plate 381 is formed with a predetermined gap from the front surface of the partition member 380, and the gap is formed smaller than the vertical dimension of the vertical section 371 of the lens member 370. Thus, when the partition member 380 is disposed inside the upright portion 371 of the lens member 370, the front surface of the regulating plate 381 can be brought into contact with the end face of the upright portion 371 of the lens member 370 (FIG. 103). reference).

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rear surface of the lens member 370 from contacting the front surface of the partition member 380. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lens member 370 from being deformed by being pushed out in contact with the front surface of the partition member 380.

  The hook-shaped portion 382 is formed to protrude in an L-shape at the outer edge of the regulating plate 381, and the bent side of the L-shape protrudes to the front side. The hook-shaped portion 382 is formed at a position facing the projection 363 of the outer frame 360 when the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 are arranged on the outer frame 360.

  Thus, in a state where the partition member 380 is disposed inside the upright portion 371 of the lens member 370, the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 can be inserted between the pair of projections 372a of the engagement portion 372 of the lens portion 370. . Therefore, rotation of the partition member 380 in the circumferential direction with respect to the outer frame 360 (the lens unit 370) can be suppressed.

  Two protruding portions 384 are formed so as to protrude toward the rear side of the partition member 380. Further, the protruding portion 384 is located on the outer edge of the partition member 380 and on the radially inner side of the hook-shaped portion 382.

  The board member 390 is formed in a disk shape coaxial with the outer frame 360, and a plurality of first LEDs 391 arranged in parallel on the front side and a plurality of second LEDs 392 arranged along the outer edge portion of the board member 390. And a socket 394 to which wiring for supplying power to the first LED 391 and the second LED 392 is connected.

  The substrate member 390 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the regulating plate 381 of the partition member 380 and to be smaller than the outer shape of the outer edge portion of the outer frame 360. The board member 390 is disposed such that the front side is in contact with the back side of the partition member 380 (see FIG. 103).

  The first LEDs 391 are disposed so as to be able to irradiate light on the front side, and a plurality of the first LEDs 391 are juxtaposed vertically and horizontally when viewed from the front of the substrate member 390. Further, an opening 383 is formed in the partition member 380 at a position facing the first LED 391. Accordingly, when the board member 390 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 380, the front end of each first LED 391 can be inserted into the inside of the opening 383. As a result, the emission of the first LED 391 can be partitioned.

  Therefore, when light is emitted from the first LED 391, the light can be emitted to the lens unit 370 by passing the light through the opening 382. In this case, since the light can be partitioned by the partition member 380 as described above, an effect of controlling the irradiation of the first LED 391 and changing the irradiation mode of the lens unit 370 can be performed.

  The second LED 392 is provided along the outer edge portion of the substrate member 390, and is disposed outside the outer diameters of the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 in a front view. Thereby, the second LED 392 can emit light, and light can be incident on the outer frame 360. When the light enters the outer frame 360, the light can be emitted from the unpainted portion to the player side as described above.

  The through hole 393 is formed at a position facing the protrusion 384 of the partition member 380 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 390, and is formed at an opening larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 384.

  The socket 394 is formed at the lower end of the board member 390 (the lower side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (the lower side in FIG. 100B)). The socket 394 is a connecting portion for connecting wiring, and is connected to wiring inserted between the above-described base member 310 and the back cover 320. That is, the socket 394 is in a state where the wiring is connected from above (from the upper side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (the upper side in FIG. 100B)).

  An opening 334f is formed in a base portion 334, which will be described later, at a position facing the socket 394 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, so that wiring connected to the socket 394 can be connected from the back side of the base portion 334. Is done.

  The rack 332 includes a rack portion 333 that extends in the vertical direction (the sliding direction of the lifting / lowering body 330 (the vertical direction in FIG. 100B)) and a lower side of the rack portion 333 (a lower side in the sliding direction of the lifting / lowering body 330 ( It is formed mainly with a semicircular base portion 334 connected to FIG.

  As described above, the rack portion 333 is a portion to which the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 14) that drives the elevating body up and down is connected (engaged), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The base portion 334 is formed in a semicircular circular shape, and is arranged at a position coaxial with the outer frame in an assembled state. The base portion 334 has a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the outer frame 360. The base portion 334 has a notch formed at the upper end side (upper side in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (the upper end side in FIG. 100B)), and the notch amount is cut downward from the upper end portion by a dimension larger than the radius. Chips are formed. That is, the base portion 334 is formed in a shape smaller than a semicircle. The base portion 334 is fastened to the holding portion 361.

  The base portion 334 mainly includes a through hole 334c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, a protrusion 334a formed to protrude forward, and a fastening portion 334b formed at a lower end portion in a columnar shape.

  The through-holes 334c are formed at three positions at the circumferential end of the outer edge of the base portion 334 and at a circumferential intermediate position. The through hole 334c is a hole through which a screw for fastening the base portion 334 and the outer frame 360 is inserted, and the through hole 334c is inserted into a hole formed in the holding portion 361a at a position facing the through hole 334. The screw is screwed.

  The protrusion 334a is formed to protrude radially inward of the through hole 334c with respect to the base portion 334. The protrusion length of the protrusion 334a toward the front side (the substrate member 390 side) is set to the distance between the rear surface of the substrate member 390 and the front surface of the base portion 334. Thus, when the base portion 334 is fastened to the outer frame 360, the tip of the projection 334a is brought into contact with the back surface of the substrate member 390.

  The fastening portion 334b is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape from the lower end side (the lower side in FIG. 100A) of the base portion 334 to the front side (the front side in FIG. 100A), and the base portion 334 334 is provided with an insertion hole 334b1 penetrating in the plate thickness direction (from the front side to the back side). Further, the fastening portion 334b is formed at a position facing the fastening portion 373 of the lens portion 370 described above. Thereby, the lower end portion of the lens portion 370 and the lower end portion of the base portion 334 can be fastened. The detailed description of the connection between the lens portion 370 and the base portion 334 will be described later.

  Next, the positional relationship between the elevating body 330 and the base member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 taken along line CIII-CIII in FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 104 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper elevating unit 300 taken along the line CIVa-CIVa of FIG. 12, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper elevating unit 300 taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG.

  Note that FIG. 104 (a) illustrates a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. 104 (b) illustrates a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the descending position.

  First, the manner of assembling the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 103 (described above), the elevating body 330 has an annular outer frame 360 disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 103), and a lens portion 370 inside the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360. Is inserted from the back side.

  The partition member 380 is inserted into the lens portion 370 from the rear side inside the upright portion 371. The board member 390 is disposed on the rear surface of the partition member 380 in a state where the protrusion 384 of the partition member 380 is inserted into the through hole 393.

  The base portion 334 of the rack 332 is disposed on the back side of the board member 390 so as to cover the lower side. The base portion 334 of the rack 332 is fastened to the holding portion 361a of the outer frame 360, and the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the like are provided between the front side of the base portion 334 of the rack 332 and the rear surface of the outer frame 360. The board member 390 is held.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from falling off from the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334. In addition, since the upper end portion of the base portion 334 is cut off, and the upper end portion on the back side of the effect portion 331 is opened, a space on the rear side of the effect portion 331 can be secured.

  Further, as described above, the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 is set to have a protruding length in contact with the back surface of the substrate member 390, and is located at the upper end portion of the base portion 334 (that is, rather than the fastening portion 334b). Located above). Therefore, the lower end side of the board member 390 can be pulled toward the back side, and a force can be applied to the upper end portion of the board member 390 in a direction of tilting forward around the contact position with the protrusion 334a. it can.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 104, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, substantially half of the upper end portion of the elevating body 330 is on the front side of the base member 310 (semicircular recessed portion 311) (see FIG. 104). 104 (a) left).

  As described above, the elevating body 330 has a state in which the upper end portion of the base portion 334 is cut off and the upper end portion on the rear side of the effect portion 331 is opened, so that the effect portion 331 (the substrate member 390) and the base member are opened. 310 (semicircular recessed portion 311) can be made closer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the width dimension from the front side to the back side (the left and right direction in FIG. 104A) of the upper elevating unit 300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position, at least a part of the rendering part 331 is partially in front of a part of the base member 310 (semicircular recessed part 311). Side (the left side in FIG. 104 (b)). In other words, the displacement distance of the lifting / lowering body 330 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 104 (a)) is set to be smaller than the vertical dimension of the semicircular recessed portion 311.

  Accordingly, when the effecting unit 331 swings back and forth (particularly, moves backward) due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced to the lowered position or the inertial force due to the start of the driving device 340 described above, the effecting unit The back surface of 331 can be brought into contact with base member 310 (semicircular recessed portion 311). As a result, it is possible to suppress the effect of the effect part 331 from swinging back and forth, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect of the effect part 331.

  Further, when the production section 331 is displaced from the lowered position (see FIG. 104 (b)) to the raised position (see FIG. 104 (a)), the upper end surface of the production section 331 is connected to the base member 310 (the semicircular concave portion). 311), it is possible to prevent the upper end of the effect portion 331 from being displaced to the rear side and colliding with the base member 310, thereby preventing the effect from being stuck.

  Further, as described above, wiring from the back side to the socket 394 is connected to the board member 390. Therefore, when the lifting / lowering body 330 is displaced to the lowered position, there is a possibility that the wiring may be visible to the player, but at least a part of the rendering part 331 is formed by the base member 310 (semicircular recessed part 311). Since a part of the wiring is overlapped with the front side, the wiring can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player by the base member 310.

  Here, a base member (base member 310) and a displacement unit (elevating body 330) displaceably disposed on the base member are provided, and the displacement unit includes a first member (outer frame 360) and a first member (outer frame 360). A second member (base portion 334) formed into an outer shape smaller than one member and superimposed on a part of the first member, interposed between the first member and the second member, and being smaller than the second member. A game machine provided with an interposed member (interposed member 335 (lens portion 370, partition member 380, substrate member 390)) formed in a large outer shape is known. According to such a gaming machine, since the portion where the second member is not overlapped with the first member is opened, the displacement unit uses the opened portion (to make the opened portion face the base member). That is, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for disposing the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first member, the area for interposing the interposed member between the first member and the second member is reduced accordingly. However, there is a problem that the interposed member is easily rattled. When the intervening member is fastened and fixed to the first member by the fastening screw in the portion where the second member is not overlapped (opened portion), it is possible to prevent rattling. The head is protruded. For this reason, the opened portion cannot be used (that is, if the opened portion faces the base member, the head of the fastening screw interferes with the base member), and it is impeded that the displacement unit approaches the base member. . As a result, the space required for disposing the base member and the displacement unit increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the interposition member 335 is interposed between the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334, the side of the interposition member 335 where the base portion 334 does not overlap the outer frame 360 is placed. Since it is formed so as to be biased toward the outer frame 360, the interposed member 335 can be pressed against the outer frame 360. As a result, rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  Further, in a portion where the base portion 334 is not overlapped (opened portion), there is no need to fasten and fix the interposition member 335 to the outer frame 360 with a fastening screw, and interference between the head of the fastening screw and the outer frame 360 is prevented. Since it does not occur, the lifting body 330 can be brought close to the outer frame 360. Therefore, the space required for disposing the outer frame 360 and the elevating body 330 can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the elevating body 330 includes connecting means (an insertion hole 334b1 and a fastening hole 373a) for connecting the base portion 334 and the interposition member 335, and the base portion 334 is formed so as to be able to abut the interposition member 335. Since the protrusion 334a is provided on the side where the base portion 334 is not overlapped on the outer frame 360 than the position where the base portion 334 and the interposition member 335 are connected by the connecting means, the base portion by the connecting means is provided. With the connection between the 334 and the interposed member 335, the protrusion 334a can be brought into contact with the interposed member 335, and the interposed member 335 can be pressed against the outer frame 360. That is, it is possible to simplify the assembling work while achieving a structure that suppresses the play of the interposition member 335.

  Further, a fastening hole 373a that is threaded into the interposition member 335 (lens part 370), an insertion hole 334b1 that is drilled in the base portion 334, and a fastening that is inserted into the insertion hole 334b1 and screwed into the fastening hole 373a. Since the connecting means is formed from the screw, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the outer frame 360, and the play of the interposed member 335 can be more reliably suppressed.

  That is, when the fastening screw is fastened, the intermediate member 335 can be attracted to the base portion 334 by the fastening force. Therefore, with the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attraction force is applied across the fulcrum (the protrusion 334a) can be pressed against the base member 310. As a result, the interposed member 335 is firmly pressed against the outer frame 360, and the play of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.

  More specifically, the fastening portion 373 has a fastening hole 373a that is formed to penetrate in an annular shape when viewed from the front. On the other hand, an insertion hole 334b1 is formed through the fastening portion 334b at a position facing the fastening hole 373a in the direction from the front side to the back side. The insertion hole 334b1 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the screw fastened to the fastening hole 373a.

  Therefore, with the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 arranged between the outer frame 360 and the base portion 334, a screw is inserted into the insertion hole 334b1, and the screw is screwed into the fastening hole 373a. be able to.

  As a result, the lower end portion (lower side in FIG. 103) of the lens portion 370 can be pulled backward, so that the lower end portion of the substrate member 390 arranged with the partition member 380 sandwiched on the back side of the lens portion 370 It can be retracted (retracted) to the side. As a result, the lens portion 370 (the partition member 380, the substrate member 390) is firmly pressed against the outer frame 360, and the rattling of the lens portion 370 (the partition member 380, the substrate member 390) can be suppressed.

  Further, the interposition member 335 includes a substrate member 390 on which the LED 391 is mounted on the surface on the base member 310 side, and a lens portion 370 disposed on the surface of the substrate member 390 on the base member 310 side. Connects the base portion 334 and the lens portion 370 of the interposed member 335, and the base member 390 of the interposed member 335 abuts on the protrusion 334a, so that the pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly. As a result, the play of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  That is, the substrate member 390 is vulnerable to partial deformation concentration, but the lens portion 370 plays a role of connecting the base portion 334 to the base portion 334 by a connecting means in which a load is easily concentrated on the connecting portion, and the partition member attracted to the base portion 334. Since the substrate member 390 can be pressed against the base portion 334 with the entire 380, concentration of a partial load on the substrate member 390 can be suppressed. As a result, pressing against the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the socket 394 is formed at the lower end portion (the lower portion in FIG. 103) of the board member 390, and wiring is connected to the socket 394 from above. Therefore, the socket 394 can be pulled toward the rear side by the tension of the wiring. Therefore, a force can be applied to the upper end portion of the substrate member 390 in a direction of tilting forward around the contact position with the protrusion 334a. As a result, pressing against the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the engagement of each member of the rendering unit 331 will be described. FIG. 105A is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 taken along the line CVa-CVa of FIG. 100A, and FIG. 105B is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 taken along the line CVb-CVb of FIG. FIG. FIG. 106A and FIG. 106B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the elevating body 330.

  Note that FIGS. 106A and 106B correspond to a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in FIG. 105A. FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state in which each member inside the elevating body 330 rattles.

  As shown in FIG. 105, between the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370, the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 is inserted between the pair of protrusions 372 a of the engaging portion 372 of the lens portion 370. The tip of the hook 382 of the partition member 380 is inserted between the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380 between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engagement portion 372 of the lens portion 370.

  The protrusion 363 is located inside the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360 and is formed to protrude from the rear side of the outer frame 360. The projection 363 is formed to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)), and is also horizontal from the inside of the bulging portion 362 (FIG. 105 (a)). b) left and right direction.

  The protrusion 372a of the engaging portion 372 is formed so as to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the upright portion 371 in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 105 (b)), and the distance in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. The dimension is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the protrusion 363 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 105A). The projection 372a is formed to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)), and the side surface on the opposite side is horizontal (FIG. 105 (b)). (Left-right direction).

  The lens portion 370 is disposed on the rear side of the outer frame 360 by inserting the projection 363 between the pair of projections 372a of the engaging portion 372 from above the rear side of the lens portion 370 with respect to the outer frame 360. Done.

  The hook-shaped portion 382 projects in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 105B) from the outer peripheral surface of the regulating plate 381 and is formed in an L-shape bent to the front side (left side in FIG. 105A). . The bent side of the hook-shaped portion 382 is formed to be inclined upward (upward in FIG. 105 (a)) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 105 (a)). Further, the thickness in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 105A) of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 is set to be smaller than the vertical distance between the pair of projections 372 a of the engaging portion 372. .

  The arrangement of the partition member 380 on the back side of the lens unit 370 is such that the partition member 380 is positioned on the rear side of the lens unit 370 from above the back side and between the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372. This is done by inserting.

  The projection 363 of the outer frame 360 is inserted into the front side between the pair of projections 372a of the engagement part 372 of the lens part 370, and the tip of the hook-shaped part 382 of the partition member 380 is inserted into the rear side.

  The engagement of the outer frame 360, the lens portion 370, and the partition member 380 superimposed from the front side (the left side in FIG. 105 (a)) to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 105 (a)) is shared by the engagement portion 372 of the lens portion 370. can do. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the engagement portion between the lens portion 370 and the outer frame 360 and the engagement portion between the lens portion 370 and the partition member 380, respectively, so that the formation of the lens portion 370 can be simplified.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the pair of protrusions 372a of the engaging portion 372 and the tip of the hook-shaped portion 382 are formed to be inclined upward toward the rear side, so that the outer frame 360 and the lens are formed. When the upper ends of the partitioning member 380 and the substrate member 390 rattle against the part 370 on the back side, the tip of the hook-shaped part 382 can be brought into contact with the inside of the engaging part 372. As a result, it is possible to prevent the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 from rattling against the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 on the back side by a predetermined amount or more.

  As shown in FIG. 106B, when the upper ends of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 rattle against the outer frame 360 on the back side, a pair of protrusions 372 a of the engagement portion 372 and Since the protrusion 363 of the outer frame 360 is formed so as to be inclined upward in the radial direction toward the back side, the end of the protrusion 363 can be easily brought into contact with the inside of the engagement portion 372. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper ends of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from being more than a predetermined amount on the back side with respect to the outer frame 360.

  That is, in a state where the protrusion 363 and the engaging portion 372 are engaged with each other, at least a part of the protrusion 363 and the engaging portion 372 are seen in a direction view (a front view) in which the base portion 334 overlaps the outer frame 360. Since the projections 363 and the engagement portions 372 overlap, the interposition member 335 in a region where the base portion 334 is not overlapped with the outer frame 360 is lifted in a direction away from the outer frame 360 by using the overlap between the projections 363 and the engagement portions 372. Can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the tips of the pair of protrusions 372a and the hook-shaped portions 382 extend in the horizontal direction, the engagement portions 372 and the upper end portions of the partition member 380 and the board member 390 when the upper ends thereof rattle on the back side. The contact area between the hook-shaped portion 382 and the tip can be increased. As a result, it is easy to suppress that the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390 are more than a predetermined amount on the back side with respect to the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370.

  Further, in the engaged state, since the lens portion 370 holds the partition member 370 and the outer frame 360, it is possible to suppress partial concentration of the load on the substrate member 390. As a result, pressing against the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  That is, the interposition member 335 in the eleventh embodiment includes a substrate member 390 on which the LED 391 is mounted on one surface side, and a partition member 380 disposed on one surface side of the substrate member 390. Since the holding means for holding holds the partition member 380 of the interposed member 335 and the substrate member 390 of the interposed member 335 is in contact with the projection 334a, the pressing to the outer frame 360 can be performed more firmly. The rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a protrusion 363 formed on the outer frame 360 and an engagement portion 372 formed on the interposition member 335 are provided, and the engagement of the projection 363 and the engagement portion 372 causes the interposition member 335 to move relative to the outer frame 360. Since the rotation can be restricted, the rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed as much as the relative rotation can be restricted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, a description will be given of the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the lower side of the lens part 370 and the lower side of the base part 334 are fastened has been described. In the twelfth embodiment, the lower part of the lens part 370 and the lower side of the outer frame 360 are connected. The case where the elastic member DB1 is disposed between the opposing members will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330 according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a sectional view of the elevating body 330. FIG. 108 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 107, an elastic member DB1 is arranged between the outer frame 360 and the lens unit 370 on the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment. Further, the lens portion 370 is formed with a projecting portion 12374 that protrudes downward from the lower end of the outer edge of the standing portion 371.

  The elastic member DB1 is formed of a material that can be elastically deformed, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped rectangular in a front view. The width dimension of the elastic member DB1 from the front side to the rear side (the left-right direction in FIG. 108) is set to be larger than the distance between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the elastic member DB1 is interposed between the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360 and the projecting portion 12374 of the lens portion 370. As described above, the width dimension of the elastic member DB1 from the front side to the rear side (horizontal direction in FIG. 108) is set to be larger than the interval between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362 of the outer frame 360 by a predetermined amount. Therefore, it is held in a state of being elastically deformed between the protruding portion 12374 and the bulging portion 362.

  This allows the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 108) of the lens portion 370 to be pulled (biased) to the rear side (right side in FIG. 108), so that the partition member 380 is sandwiched on the rear side of the lens portion 370. The lower end portion of the substrate member 390 arranged in the above can be pulled (biased) toward the rear side.

  As described above, the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 is set to have a protruding length in contact with the back surface of the substrate member 390, and is located at the upper end of the base portion 334 (that is, above the protruding portion 12374). Placed on).

  Therefore, by setting the lower end side of the board member 390 to the state of being pulled back (biased) to the back side, the force in the direction of inclining forward at the upper end portion of the board member 390 around the contact position with the protrusion 334a. Can work.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the upper end sides of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from rattling on the back side of the outer frame 360. As a result, the effect of the outer frame 370 and the lens portion 370 can be easily recognized by the player.

  Therefore, in the elevating body 330 in the twelfth embodiment, a connecting member (see the eleventh embodiment) is formed by the elastic member DB1 interposed in a state of being compressed and deformed between the base member 310 and the interposing member 335. Therefore, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and the play of the interposed member 335 can be more reliably suppressed.

  That is, the interposed member 335 can be attracted to the base portion 334 by the elastic recovery force of the elastic member DB1. Therefore, with the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum, the side opposite to the side on which the attraction force is applied across the fulcrum (the protrusion 334a) can be pressed against the base member 310. As a result, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and the play of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.

  Further, since it is not necessary to fasten a screw to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 108) of the upper end portion of the effect part 331, it is possible to prevent the upper elevating unit 300 from increasing in the direction from the front to the rear side (the horizontal direction in FIG. 108).

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the elastic member DB1 is disposed below the interposition member 335 to utilize the compression deformation of the elastic member DB1 has been described. The same effect can be obtained even if it is arranged above the installation member 335.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, a description will be given of an elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, the case where the lower side of the lens part 370 and the lower side of the base part 334 are fastened is described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the lower part of the lens part 370 and the lower side of the outer frame 360 are connected. Will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective front view of the elevating body 330 according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a sectional view of the elevating body 330. Note that FIG. 110 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 109, a projecting portion 13374 projecting downward from the lower edge of the outer edge of the upright portion 371 is formed in the lens portion 370 of the elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment. Further, the base portion 334 is formed with an engaging portion 13334d that projects in a hook shape from the rear side (the right side in FIG. 110) to the front side (the left side in FIG. 110). The engagement portion 13334d is formed so as to protrude from the lower side of the base portion 334 to the front side, and is formed in an L-shaped cross section in which a front end portion is bent upward.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d is formed in a substantially triangular shape in cross-section, and the front and rear (left and right in FIG. 110) upper surfaces are the front side (left in FIG. 110) and the rear side (FIG. 110). (Right side).

  The engaging portion 13334d and the protruding portion 13374 are in a state where the inclined surface 13334d1 on the back side of the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d is in contact with the tip portion of the protruding portion 13374 when the elevating body 330 is assembled. You.

  The vertical position of the upper surface on the base end side of the engaging portion 13334d is set to be substantially the same as the vertical position of the protruding distal position of the protruding portion 13374, and the protruding distance to the bent portion is set to the protruding portion. It is set smaller by a predetermined amount than the space between 13374 and the base portion 334.

  This allows the bent inclined surface 13334d1 to engage (contact) the protruding portion 13374 while elastically deforming the base end side of the engaging portion 13334d. Therefore, since the engaging portion 13334d is elastically deformed and held, the force acting by the elastic recovery force can be applied to the lens portion 370 through the projecting portion 13374.

  More specifically, when the engagement portion 13334e is elastically deformed, the bent portion is displaced downward. Accordingly, the inclined surface 13334d1 and the protruding portion 13374 are brought into contact with each other, so that the force that the inclined surface 13334d1 attempts to elastically recover upward applies a force in a direction of pulling the distal end portion of the protruding portion 13374 back. Can work.

  As a result, the lower end portion of the lens portion 370 can be pulled backward (pulled in), so that the lower end portion of the substrate member 390 disposed on the rear side of the lens portion 370 with the partition member 380 interposed therebetween is positioned on the rear side. It can be in the retracted (retracted) state.

  As described above, the protrusion 334a of the base portion 334 is set to have a protruding length in contact with the back surface of the substrate member 390, and is located at the upper end of the base portion 334 (that is, above the engagement portion 13334e). Placed on).

  Therefore, by setting the lower end of the board member 390 to the rear side (pulling in), a force is applied to the upper end of the board member 390 in a direction of tilting forward around the contact position with the protrusion 334a. be able to.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the upper end sides of the lens portion 370, the partition member 380, and the substrate member 390 from rattling on the back side of the outer frame 360. As a result, the effect of the outer frame 370 and the lens portion 370 can be easily recognized by the player.

  Therefore, in the elevating body 330 in the thirteenth embodiment, a connecting means is formed from the engaging portion 13334d provided on the base portion 334 so as to be able to lock the interposing member 335, and the engaging portion 13334d is Since the interposed member 335 is locked in a state where the member 335 is urged against the protrusion 334a, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and the looseness of the interposed member 335 can be more reliably achieved. Can be suppressed.

  That is, since the interposition member 335 is urged to the projection 334a when locked by the engaging portion 13334d, the attraction force is applied with the projection 334a of the base portion 334 as a fulcrum, with the fulcrum (the projection 334a) interposed therebetween. The opposite side can be pressed against the base member 310. As a result, the interposed member 335 can be firmly pressed against the base member 310, and the play of the interposed member 335 can be suppressed.

  Further, at the time of assembling the elevating body 330, by connecting the engaging portion 13334 d to the interposition member 335, the interposition member 335 and the base portion 334 can be connected, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 334 b 1. Since there is no need to perform a fastening operation such as insertion or screwing, the number of steps can be reduced and the workability of the assembling operation can be improved.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to fasten a screw to the back side of the upper end portion of the effect part 331, it is possible to suppress the upper elevating unit 300 from increasing in the front-rear direction.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the bent portion of the engagement portion 13334d is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section. Thereby, when the inclined surface 13334d1 of the engaging portion 13334d is engaged (contacted) with the protruding portion 13374, it can be easily engaged.

  More specifically, when disposing the base portion 334 on the back surface side of the outer frame 360 (the substrate member 390), the end of the protruding portion 13374 abuts on the inclined surface 13334d1 on the bending tip side of the engaging portion 13334d. By doing so, it is possible to position the bent portion of the engaging portion 13334d on the front side of the protruding portion 13374 while elastically deforming the base end side of the engaging portion 13334d.

  Therefore, the engagement between the engaging portion 13334d and the protruding portion 13374 can be performed together with the operation of disposing the base portion 334 on the back side of the outer frame 360 (the substrate member 390). Can be easily performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a description will be given of an elevating body 330 according to a fourteenth embodiment. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, the case where the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 are engaged only with the protrusion 363 and the engagement portion 372 has been described. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lower end portion of the outer frame 360 (see FIG. The case where the lower part (the lower part in FIG. 111) and the lower end part (the lower part in FIG. 111) of the lens unit 370 are engaged will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 111 is a cross-sectional view of the lifting body 330 according to the fourteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 111 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the outer frame 360 of the elevating body 330 in the fourteenth embodiment has an engaging portion 14362a that projects from the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 111) of the bulging portion 362 to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 111). Is formed. The engaging portion 14362a is formed so as to protrude to the rear side, and has an L-shaped cross section including a standing portion 14362a1 which is bent and erected upward (upward in FIG. 111) at the distal end.

  A convex portion 14375 protruding radially outward (downward) is formed on the outer edge of the lower end of the lens portion 370. The width of the convex portion 14375 from the front side (the left side in FIG. 111) to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 11) is set to be smaller than the distance between the bulging portion 362 and the upright portion 14362a1.

  Therefore, when disposing the lens portion 370 on the back side of the outer frame 360, the convex portion 14375 of the lens portion 370 can be inserted between the bulging portion 362 and the standing portion 14362a1. Thereby, when the lower end side of the lens portion 370 rattles to the back side, the rear side of the convex portion 14375 can be brought into contact with the upright portion 14362a1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower end side (the lower part in FIG. 111) of the lens unit 370 from being displaced toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 111) with respect to the outer frame 360.

  Here, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, since there is no means for engaging the lower end side of the lens unit 370, the lower end side of the lens unit 370 is retracted to the back side, and the lower end of the lens unit 370 is moved relative to the outer frame 360. There was a risk that the side would rattle to the back side.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, since the outer frame 360 and the lens portion 370 are engaged (held) at the lower end (the lower portion in FIG. 111), the lower end of the lens portion 370 is positioned with respect to the outer frame 360. It is possible to suppress rattling on the back side.

  The elevating body 330 includes holding means (an engaging portion 14362a1 and a convex portion 14375) formed on the outer frame 360 and holding the interposed member 335. Since the interposition member 335 is held at the position connected to the portion 334, the base portion 334 is superimposed on the outer frame 360 when the interposition member 335 is pulled to the base portion 334 by the action of the connection means. The formation of a gap between the outer frame 360 and the interposed member 335 can be suppressed on the side opposite to the side without the gap. As a result, the appearance of the elevating body 330 can be improved.

  Next, an upper elevating unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the transmission of the driving force to the four elevating members 330 arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (horizontal direction in FIG. 13) is centered in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (horizontal direction in FIG. 13). Although the case where the power is transmitted from the inside has been described, in the fifteenth embodiment, the transmission of the driving force to the four elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 112) is performed. It is transmitted from the outside in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 112). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the upper elevating unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a rear view of the upper elevating unit 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment. FIGS. 113A and 113B are rear views of the upper elevating unit 15300 in a range CXIII in FIG. 112.

  112 and 113 show a state in which the back cover 320 and the drive motor 341 have been removed. Also, FIGS. 112 and 113 (a) show a state in which all four lifting and lowering bodies 330 arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (horizontal direction in FIG. 112) are at the lowered position. Further, FIG. 113 (b) illustrates a state where the elevating body 330 is displaced upward by a predetermined amount from the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the elevating body 330 in the fifteenth embodiment, the tooth surfaces of the racks 332 are formed on the left and right outer sides centering on the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310. The gear 15352 is engaged.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 113, the second gear 15352 is rotationally driven from the lowered position (the position shown in FIG. 113A) to move the elevating body 330 upward by a predetermined amount (the position shown in FIG. 113B). ), The effect portion 331 arranged on the elevating body 330 is displaced upward while tilting in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) due to the inertia force at the initial stage of driving.

  More specifically, the elevating body 330 is configured to be displaceable by a rack 332 (rack) and a second gear 15352 (pinion). Therefore, when the second gear 15352 is rotated and the rack 332 is driven, a force in the direction away from the second gear 15352 acts on the rack 332 in the displacement direction. Therefore, the rendering part 331 arranged on the opposite side to the displacement direction of the rack 332 is displaced upward while tilting in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left-right direction in FIG. 112).

  Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the two centers of the elevating body 330 (directing unit 331) disposed in the upper elevating unit 15300 are directed from the front side to the back side (FIG. 113A). Side direction) and are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (horizontal direction in FIG. 113 (a)), so that the rendering section 331 of the base member 310 There is a possibility that one of the effect parts 331 is inclined in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 113B) and collides with the other effect part 331.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of each rack 332 is formed at a position outside the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 113A) of the base member 310, and the transmission gear 352 of the second gear 15352 Are combined.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), in the elevating body 330 in which the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (right side in FIG. 113 (b)), the second gear 15352 is rotated. Then, the rack 332 at one end in the short direction (upper end in FIG. 113B) of the base member 310 is pushed out to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (left side in FIG. 113B). Thus, the rack 332 at the other end in the short direction of the base member 310 (the lower end in FIG. 113B) is inclined to the other longitudinal side of the base member 310 (the right side in FIG. 113B). Therefore, the rendering part 331 can be displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the right side in FIG. 113B).

  On the other hand, when the second gear 15342 is rotated, the elevating body 330 in which the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left side in FIG. The rack 332 on one side (the upper end in FIG. 113B) is pushed out to the other longitudinal side of the base member 310 (the right side in FIG. 113B). Accordingly, the rack 332 on the other side in the short direction of the base portion (the lower end in FIG. 113B) is inclined to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left side in FIG. 113B). Therefore, the effect portion 331 can be displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 310 (the left side in FIG. 113B).

  Accordingly, when the second gear 352 is rotated and the rack 332 is driven (the lifting body 330 is displaced upward) from the state where the lifting body 330 is located at the lower end position (the position shown in FIG. 113A), The effect parts 331 of the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side on the left and right can be displaced in the direction X1 (see FIG. 113 (b)) apart from each other.

  As a result, when the two central production parts 331 of the elevating body 330 disposed in the upper elevating unit 15300 are displaced from the lowered position, it is possible to prevent one production part 331 from colliding with the other production part 331. it can.

  Next, the second gear 15352 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 (a) is a front view of the second gear 15352, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the second gear 15352.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the second gear 15352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side (left side in FIG. 114 (b)) and the rear side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)). An intermediate plate 15353, a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 15353 and having a tooth profile partially deformed, and a rack 332 (formed on the rear side of the intermediate plate 15353 into a spur gear shape). (See FIG. 15).

  The intermediate plate 15353 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from tips of gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the second gear 15352 is attached to the intermediate plate 15353 in a direction parallel to the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) meshed with the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. By overlapping, it can be brought into contact with the intermediate plate 15353 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the counterpart member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) from moving in a direction parallel to the tooth surface when the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  Further, the intermediate plate 15353 has a bulging portion 15353a which bulges radially outward from a part of the outer edge portion. The bulging portion 15353a is formed so as to bulge in a semicircular shape in a front view, and has the same thickness as the central side of the intermediate plate 15353. The detailed description of the distance dimension R1 of the bulging portion 15353a from the rotation center of the second gear 15352 will be described later.

  The bulging portion 15353a is formed by bulging radially outward from a part of the intermediate plate 15353, and thus can be brought into contact with the side surface of the rack 332 in a state where the elevating body 330 is assembled. Therefore, the portion where the distance between the bulging portion 15353a and the abutted portion 332b is minimum (the bulging tip) is set to a position where the later-described rendering portion 331 (rack 332) is easily affected by inertial force. You. Therefore, rattling of the rack 332 is likely to occur. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the bulging portion 15353a is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface of the rack 332.

  Next, a case where the lifting body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 115 (a) and 116 (a) are front views of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350, and FIG. 115 (b) is a view of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the range CXVb of FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 116B is a front view of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in a range CXVIb of FIG. 116A.

  In FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b), the state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position is shown. In FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b), the elevating body 330 is in the ascending position (FIG. 115). The position displaced downward by a predetermined amount from the position shown in FIG. 115 (b) and 116 (b), an imaginary line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and an imaginary line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  The rack 332 is formed with a bulging portion 15353a that bulges from the front (front side in FIG. 115A). The bulging portion 15353a is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the rack 332 by a predetermined amount in a front view. In addition, the bulging portion 15353a is set at a position protruding more toward the front side (on the near side in FIG. 115A) than the intermediate plate 15353 of the second gear 15352 in the state assembled to the elevating body 330. .

  In the second gear 15352, the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 114 (b)) is meshed with the rack 332 on the back side of the intermediate plate 15353 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 115 (b)). The modified gear portion 354 of the second gear 15352 is meshed with the first gear 351 on the front side of the intermediate plate 15353 (on the front side in FIG. 115B).

  Further, the second gear 15352 is set to be rotatable by half a circumference in the circumferential direction. By rotating the second gear 15352 by a half turn, the elevating body 330 can be displaced to an ascending position (a position shown in FIG. 115A) and a descending position (a position shown in FIG. 115B).

  As shown in FIG. 115, in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position (a state shown in FIG. 115A), the protruding tip portion of the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is connected to the second gear 15352. Is positioned above the rotation axis of the direction (gravity line KJ1). The protruding tip of the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 is located between the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332 and the second gear 15352 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 115B). .

  The second gear 15352 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward. Therefore, at the initial stage of driving, the tip of the bulging portion 15353a is displaced downward in the direction of gravity (direction of the imaginary line KJ1), and the contact portion of the rack 332 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 115B). It is displaced in a direction approaching the 332b side.

  The bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 and the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332 are slid in the sliding direction of the elevating body 330 (vertical direction in FIG. 115A) and in the direction from the front to the rear (FIG. 115A). A predetermined gap R3 is provided between opposing sides in a direction (horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115B)) orthogonal to a direction from the near side to the far side of the drawing.

  That is, when the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position, the distance from the rotation center of the second gear 15352 of the bulging portion 15353a to the end on the contacted portion 332b side is equal to the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332. The distance R2 from one side surface (the right side surface in FIG. 115A) to the rotation center of the second gear 15352 is set to be smaller. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the elevated position (downward in FIG. 115A), the gap R3 is formed, so that the rack 332 can be started smoothly.

  Here, in the upper elevating unit 15300 (see FIG. 112), the tooth surface of each rack 332 is formed at a position outside the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310, and the transmission gear 352 of the second gear 15352 is formed. Meshed. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position (the state shown in FIG. 115A), the elevating body 330 is moved in the longitudinal direction of the rack 332 by the inertia force of the drive. (FIG. 115 (a) up and down) is tilted from a state where it is parallel to the direction of gravity. Due to this inclination, there is a possibility that a plurality of elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 112) of the base member 310 (see FIG. 112) may collide with an adjacent elevating body 330.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the bulging portion 15353a is formed in the second gear 15352, the inertia force generated when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position is provided. The displacement in the left-right direction of the effect part 331 (the inclination of the rack 332) can be suppressed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 116, the second gear 15352 is rotated from the state where the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position (the state shown in FIG. 115A), and the elevating body 330 is displaced downward. Then, the end of the rack 332 on the displacement direction side (the lower side in FIG. 116A) is pushed out by the second gear 15352 in a direction away from the second gear 15352.

  Thereby, the rendering section 331 disposed on the side of the displacement direction of the rack 332 (the lower side in FIG. 116A) is displaced in the direction X2 (see FIG. 116A). As described above, the slide shaft 332a of the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320 (see FIG. 15). Therefore, when the effect part 331 is displaced in the direction X2, the side surface of the slide shaft 332a comes into contact with the inner wall of the guide hole 323. Thereby, the upper end side of the rack 332 is rotationally displaced in the direction X3 (see FIG. 116 (a)) opposite to the direction X2 about the contact portion between the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323.

  When the rendering unit 331 is displaced in the direction X2 and the rack 332 is inclined in the direction of the virtual line KJ2 with respect to the direction of gravity (virtual line KJ1), one side of the contacted portion 332b of the rack 332 ( The side surface of FIG. 116 (right side) can be brought into contact with the outer edge of the bulging portion 15353a. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the effect of the effect part 331 from being displaced in the direction X2. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, it is possible to suppress one of the effect parts 331 from colliding with the other effect part 331.

  Therefore, when the lifting body 330 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 116A) from the state where the lifting body 330 is disposed at the lifting position, one of the effect units 331 is connected to the other. Collision with the effect part 331 can be suppressed.

  The bulging portion 15353a is formed by partially bulging from the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate plate 15353. Therefore, when the lifting / lowering body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position by a predetermined amount or more, the bulging portion 15353a and the rack 332 are displaced. Since the gap with the side surface of the abutted portion 332b can be increased, the displacement of the rack 332 can be made smooth.

  In other words, since the regulation of the displacement of the rack 332 can be limited to only the area where the inertia force at the time of starting makes it easy to displace, in a section where the inertial force in the left and right directions does not act, the regulation is released. 332 can be smoothly displaced.

  The second gear 15352 is set to be rotatable by half a circumference in the circumferential direction, and the bulging portion 15353a is formed by bulging partially from the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate plate 15353. The distance between the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 15353a and one side of the contacted portion 332b (the right side in FIG. 115B) can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the second gear 15352). Therefore, for example, the position at which the displacement (rotation of the pinion) of the production unit 331 starts or the position at which the displacement speed (the rotation speed of the pinion) of the production unit 331 is changed (that is, the production unit 331 (the rack 332) is affected by the inertial force). In a position where the effect is easily received, the bulging portion 15353a is brought into contact with the abutted portion 332b to prevent the effecting portion 331 from colliding with the adjacent effecting portion 331. On the other hand, for example, the displacement of the effecting portion 331 (pinion) In a position where the rotation of the rack 332 is in a steady state, the allowable amount of displacement of the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement by the guide members (slide shaft 332a and guide hole 323) is ensured, and dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance are secured. , The load on the driving means can be suppressed, and the linear displacement of the rack 332 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of the collision between the rendering parts 331 and the assurance of the backlash of the rack 332 with respect to the guide members (the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323).

  Since the regulation of the displacement of the rendering unit 331 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 116A) can be formed on a part (the intermediate plate 15353) of the second gear 15352 that displaces the rendering unit 331, the rendering unit 331 is provided. It is not necessary to newly dispose a component for restricting the lateral displacement of the device, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Here, a pair of a displacement unit (elevating body 330) having a driving unit (driving device 340) for generating a driving force and a displacement member (producing unit 331) displaced by the driving force of the driving unit is provided. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a displacement unit is arranged with displacement trajectories of displacement members adjacent to each other is known. According to such a gaming machine, an effect of displacing both displacement members in the same direction while juxtaposing them, or an effect of displacing only one displacement member can be performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the displacement is started by receiving the driving force from the driving means, the displacement members are displaced in a direction approaching the adjacent displacement members due to the influence of the inertia force, and the displacement members are displaced from each other. There was a problem that there was a risk of collision. If the spacing between the displacement units is increased to avoid collision of the displacement members, not only does the disposition space increase, but also, for example, a sense of unity when displacing the two displacement members in the same direction while juxtaposing them. Cannot be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the suppression means (suppressing the directing unit 331 from approaching the adjacent directing unit 331 due to the inertial force when displaced by the driving force of the driving unit (driving device 340) ( Since the swelling portion 15353a) of the second gear 15352 is provided, it is possible to suppress a collision between the staging portions 331. As a result, the space between the elevating bodies 330 can be reduced, so that the arrangement space can be suppressed and, for example, a sense of unity can be formed when displacing in the same direction while the two production parts 331 are arranged side by side.

  In addition, by providing the second gear 15352 rotated by the driving force of the driving device 340 and the rack 332 in which the second gear 15352 meshes and in which the staging unit 331 is disposed, the staging unit 331 can be straightened. Can be displaced. That is, the displacement trajectories of the rendering unit 331 can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is easy to form a sense of unity in the displacement of the adjacent effect parts 331.

  In this case, the guide member (slide shaft 332a and guide hole 323) allows a linear displacement of the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement in consideration of a dimensional tolerance and an assembly tolerance of each part. It is necessary to guide in the state where it was done.

  However, if the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed, the second gear 15352 is rotated, and when the linear displacement of the rack 332 is started, the rack 332 is rotated by the influence of inertia force. As a result of the generation of the force, the rendering unit 331 is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. Therefore, there is a possibility that the rendering unit 331 may collide with the rendering unit 331 adjacent thereto.

  On the other hand, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the suppression means (the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352) regulates the displacement of the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement, thereby producing an effect. Since the part 331 is suppressed from approaching the adjacent effect part 331, it is possible to prevent the effect part 331 from colliding with the adjacent effect part 331.

  In other words, the suppression means includes a bulging portion 15353a formed to protrude radially outward from the second gear 15352, and an abutted portion 332b formed on the rack 332 such that the bulging portion 15353a can abut. When the bulging portion 15353a is brought into contact with the abutted portion 332b, the displacement of the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is regulated, so that the rendering portion 331 collides with the adjacent rendering portion 331. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the pair of lifting / lowering bodies 330 are disposed in such a manner that the engagement surfaces of the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 and the rack 332 are directed to opposite sides, the production portion is influenced by the inertial force. The direction in which the 331 is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement (the vertical direction in FIG. 116A) (the left-right direction in FIG. 116A) can be opposite to each other in the pair of elevating bodies 330.

  That is, when the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (downward in FIG. 116 (a)), the effect parts 331 are brought close to each other, while the rack 332 is linearly moved in the other direction (upward in FIG. 116 (b)). When displaced, the effect parts 331 are separated from each other. Therefore, the suppressing means only needs to be able to cope with the case where the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (FIG. 116 (a) downward), and the rack 332 is linearly displaced in one direction (FIG. 116 (a) downward). It is not necessary to deal with both the case where the displacement is made and the case where the displacement is made linearly in the other direction (the upward direction in FIG. 116 (b)), so that the structure of the suppressing means can be simplified accordingly.

  Next, the second gear 16352 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 abuts against the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332, thereby displacing the staging portion 331 in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 116A). In the sixteenth embodiment, the projection 16353b is inserted into the guide groove 16332b of the rack 332, thereby displacing the staging part 331 in the horizontal direction (the left and right directions in FIG. 117A). (Tilt of the rack 332) is suppressed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b) are front views of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 117 (a) corresponds to FIG. 115 (b), and FIG. 117 (b) corresponds to a front view of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116 (b). In FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b), the guide grooves 16332b and the projections 16353b formed in the rack 332 are shown by broken lines. Also, in FIG. 117 (a) and FIG. 117 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the direction in which the rack 332 extends are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the second gear 16352 in the sixteenth embodiment has a toothed shape on the front side (front side in FIG. 117 (a)) and on the rear side (back side in FIG. 117 (a)). An intermediate plate 16353 composed of two different layers of gears and configured in the shape of a donut plate, a modified gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 16353 and having a partially irregular tooth shape, and a back surface of the intermediate plate 16353 A transmission gear portion 355 formed in a spur gear shape on the side and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15).

  The intermediate plate 16353 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from tips of gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, a mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) meshed with the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 16353 is attached to the intermediate plate 15353 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface. By overlapping, it can be brought into contact with the intermediate plate 15353 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the counterpart member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) from moving in a direction parallel to the tooth surface when the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  The intermediate plate 16353 has a bulging portion 16353a bulging radially outward from a part of the outer edge portion. The bulging portion 16353a is formed so as to bulge in a semi-circular shape in a front view, and has the same thickness as the center side of the intermediate plate 16353.

  The bulging portion 16353a is formed with a columnar projection 16353b protruding from a side surface (the depth side in FIG. 117A) facing the rack 332. That is, the protrusion 16353b is formed to protrude toward the rack 332 side. The protrusion 16353b has a projecting dimension smaller than a concave (depth) dimension of a guide groove 16332b of the rack 332 described later.

  A guide groove 16332b is formed in the rack 332 so as to be recessed on the side surface (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 117A) facing the side surface (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 117A) of the bulging portion 16353a of the second gear 16352. Is done.

  The guide groove 16332b is formed to have a depth that is equal to or less than half the thickness of the rack 332, and is recessed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The guide groove 16332b is set such that the inner wall has a facing dimension larger than the outer diameter of the projection 16353b.

  In addition, the guide groove 16332b is formed to be concave on the displacement locus of the projection 16353b of the second gear 16352. Thus, when the second gear 16352 rotates and the protrusion 16353b is displaced to a position overlapping the rack 332 in the front-rear direction, the protrusion 16353b can be inserted into the guide groove 16332b.

  Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the elevating body 330 is arranged with the projection 16353b inserted inside the guide groove 16332b.

  Therefore, in a state where the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 1), and the staging unit 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 117 (b)). In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the projection 16353b can be brought into contact with the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from being displaced in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 117B) (the rack 332 is tilted). As a result, it is possible to prevent the effecting unit 331 from displacing in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 117B) and causing one effecting unit 331 to collide with the other effecting unit 331.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position, the effect is caused by the displacement of the staging unit 331 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 117 (b)). The left and right displacement of the upper end of the rack 332 can be suppressed by the outer peripheral surface of the projection 16353b abutting against the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. As a result, it is possible to suppress one of the effect units 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331 due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the predetermined gap R3 between the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 16353a and one surface (the right side in FIG. 117B) of the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332 is formed by the inner wall of the guide groove 16332b. It is preferable that the distance be set to a value larger than the gap size between the projection and the projection 16353b. That is, the bulging portion 16353a in the sixteenth embodiment is set smaller than the bulging portion 15353a in the fifteenth embodiment.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 abuts against the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332, and the displacement (rack) of the staging portion 331 in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 116B). Although the case where the tilt 332 is suppressed has been described, in the seventeenth embodiment, the rack 332 and the rear cover 320 are brought into contact with each other to suppress the displacement of the effect portion 331 in the left-right direction (the tilt of the rack 332). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b) are front views of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the seventeenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 118A corresponds to FIG. 115B, and FIG. 118B corresponds to a front view of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116B. Also, in FIG. 118 (a) and FIG. 118 (b), an imaginary line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and an imaginary line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the rack 332 in the seventeenth embodiment swells from the side surface (the left side in FIG. 118 (a)) opposite to the rack tooth surface meshing with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352. A contact portion 17332c is formed.

  In addition, the rear cover 320 formed in a box shape protrudes toward the rack 332 (the right side in FIG. 118 (a)) from a position facing the contact portion 17332c in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position. A regulating portion 17325 is formed.

  When the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position, the contact portion 17332c and the regulating portion 17325 have a predetermined gap R4 (see FIG. 118 (a)) facing each other (see FIG. 118 (a) left and right directions). It is formed. Further, the contact portion 17332c is formed longer in the extending direction of the rack 332 (vertical direction in FIG. 118) than the regulating portion 17325. In a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the lower end (the lower end in FIG. 118A) of the abutting portion 17332 c is in a state of abutting on the regulating portion 17325.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118B, when the elevating body 330 is displaced from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating body 330 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 118B) with respect to the back cover 320. The contact portion 17332c is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 118B).

  As described above, the abutting portion 17332c extends in the up-down direction beyond the regulating portion 17325, and the lower end side and the regulating portion 17325 face each other in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the rising position. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 starts to be started downward from the ascending position, the contact portion 17332c and the regulating portion 17325 can be in a state in which the abutting portion 17332c and the regulating portion 17325 are opposed to each other in the horizontal direction (in the horizontal direction in FIG.

  In this case, the effect portion 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 118B) (the rack 332 is tilted) due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position, and the rack 332 is hit. When the contact portion 17332c is displaced by the value of the gap R4 or more, the contact portion 17332c can be brought into contact with the regulating portion 17325.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from being displaced left and right by more than a predetermined value at the time of starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress one of the effect units 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331 due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portion 15353a of the second gear 15352 abuts against the abutted portion 332b of the rack 332, thereby displacing the staging portion 331 in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 116A). In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting of the rack 332 is suppressed has been described. However, in the eighteenth embodiment, the resilient force of the magnets disposed on the rack 332 and the back cover 320 causes the rendering unit 331 to move in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 119A). (Tilt of the rack 332) is suppressed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b) are front views of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the eighteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 119 (a) corresponds to FIG. 115 (b), and FIG. 119 (b) corresponds to a front view of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 of FIG. 116 (b). In FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), the outer diameters of the embedded first magnet 18332d and second magnet 18326 are shown by broken lines. 119 (a) and 119 (b), an imaginary line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and an imaginary line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the rack 332 in the eighteenth embodiment has an inner portion at an end opposite to the rack tooth surface meshing with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 (the left side in FIG. 119 (a)). The first magnet 18332d is embedded.

  The case member 210 (see FIG. 14) formed in a box shape has a side surface on which the first magnet 18332d of the rack 332 is buried (FIG. 119 (a)) in a state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position. ) Left side) and a second magnet 18326 embedded at a position facing the left side.

  The first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 are magnetic materials having magnetism, and are arranged in a state where they are separated (repelled).

  The first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 are partially overlapped in the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 119 (a)) when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, and The first magnet 18332d to be buried is placed above the second magnet 18326.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the elevating body 330 is displaced from the ascending position (the position shown in FIG. 119 (a)) to the descent, the elevating body 330 is displaced downward with respect to the back cover 320. Therefore, the first magnet 18332d is displaced downward.

  As described above, since the first magnet 18332d is arranged above the second magnet 18326 in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the elevating body 330 starts to start downward from the ascending position. At this time, the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 can be in a state of overlapping in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 119A).

  In this case, the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 are repelled, so that the rendering unit 331 is moved leftward in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 119 (b)) by inertia force when the lifting body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position. ) Can be suppressed. That is, the repulsive force of the first magnet 18332d and the second magnet 18326 can be caused to act in a direction opposite to the direction in which the rendering unit 331 is displaced when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from being displaced in the horizontal direction (right and left direction in FIG. 119 (b)) at the time of starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress one of the effect units 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331 due to the inertial force when the elevating body 330 is displaced.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed linearly has been described. However, in the nineteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of the rack 332 is formed to be partially inclined. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 120A and 120B are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the nineteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 120A and 120B show a state where the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 have been removed. Also, in FIG. 120 (a) and FIG. 120 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the direction in which the rack 332 extends are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the tooth surfaces meshing with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 of the rack 332 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the first tooth surface 19332e formed parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332. The second tooth surface 19332f is formed so as to be inclined (non-parallel) with the extending direction of the rack 332.

  The first tooth surface 19332e is formed in a section of the first region L1 at the upper end portion of the rack 332, and when the transmission gear portion 355 meshes with the first tooth surface 19332e, the rack 332 extends from the rack 332. It can be displaced in the installation direction (vertical direction).

  The second tooth surface 19332f is formed in a section of the second region L2 at the lower end portion of the rack 332, and is formed so as to be inclined in a direction approaching the second gear 352 side as the distance from the first tooth surface 19332e increases. Is done. When the transmission gear portion 355 meshes with the second tooth surface 19332f, the rack 332 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 19332f. That is, the upper end (the upper end in FIG. 120A) of the rack 332 is located on the left side in the horizontal direction (the left side in FIG. 120A), and the lower end (the lower end in FIG. 120A) is located on the right side in the horizontal direction (see FIG. a) can be offset to the right.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the second gear 352 is brought into mesh with the second tooth surface 19332f. Accordingly, the upper end portion of the rack 332 is pushed out to the left in the horizontal direction (the left side in FIG. 120A) by the amount that the second tooth surface 19332f is inclined toward the second gear 353, and the extending direction of the rack 332 is indicated by a virtual line KJ1. And a state in which it is tilted non-parallel.

  In this case, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the raised position, the upper end of the rack 332 can be displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (the right side in FIG. 120 (b)) while displacing the elevating body 330 downward. .

  Further, the section length of the second region L2 is determined by the section (rack 332) in which the rendering section 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 120 (b)) by the inertia force at the initial stage of driving when the elevating body 330 is driven. The length of the rack 332 is set to be longer than the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 120 (b)) of the rack 332 that is pushed out to the left in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 120B) from the second gear 352.

  As described above, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed on the rear side of the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be inclined with respect to the virtual line KJ1.

  In a state where the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position, the rack 332 is pushed out to the left in the horizontal direction (the left side in FIG. 120A) by the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352, and the rack 332 is moved to the slide shaft 332a. And the upper end of the rack 332 (the upper end in FIG. 120A) is displaced in the direction away from the second gear 352 (the leftward direction in FIG. 120A).

  Here, as described above, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position, the effect portion 331 is displaced rightward in the horizontal direction (the right side in FIG. 120 (b)) due to its inertial force. Therefore, there is a possibility that one of the effect parts 331 of the adjacent elevating body 330 collides with the other effect part 331.

  On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the second tooth surface 19332f is formed to be inclined, and the second section L2 is displaced by the inertia force so that the rendering section 331 is displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (to the right in FIG. 120 (b)). (The section in the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 120 (b)) of the rack 332 in which the rack 332 is extruded leftward in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 120 (b)) from the second gear 352. Therefore, when the elevating body 330 is driven, it is possible to suppress one of the effect units 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331.

  In other words, the elevating body 330 is biased in a direction (leftward in FIG. 120 (a)) opposite to a direction (rightward in FIG. 120 (a)) that is displaced by inertia when driven. When the elevating body 330 is driven in a downward direction (downward in FIG. 120A), the range in which the rendering section 331 is displaced in the horizontal direction can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it is possible to suppress one of the effect parts 331 from colliding with the adjacent other effect part 331.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the tooth surface of the rack 332 is provided with an inclined tooth surface (second tooth surface 19332f), and the second gear 352 is meshed with the inclined tooth surface (second tooth surface 19332f). The rack 332 can be biased in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement and away from the adjacent rack 332.

  That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even when the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the effect of inertia, the effect unit 331 is positioned adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.

  Further, by rotating the second gear 352 from a state where the second gear 352 is meshed with the inclined tooth surface (the second tooth surface 19332f), the second gear 352 is added to the parallel tooth surface (the first tooth surface 19332e). When the linear displacement of the rack 332 is started, the inertial force of the rack 332 caused by the influence of the inertial force can be suppressed as compared with the case where the gears are meshed. That is, the direction in which the rack 332 is pushed out by the driving of the second gear 352 can be parallel to the driving direction of the rack 332 (the vertical direction in FIG. 120A). Therefore, when the rack 332 is driven by the driving of the second gear 352, the inertial force due to the driving of the second gear 352 can be suppressed from acting in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 120A). It is possible to prevent the section 331 from colliding with the adjacent rendering section 331.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 is formed in a circular shape has been described. In the twentieth embodiment, the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 is formed in an elliptical shape. The case will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 121A and 121B are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the twentieth embodiment. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state where the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 have been removed. In FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b), the elevating body 330 is schematically illustrated, and the outer shapes of the guide hole 323 and the slide shaft 332a are illustrated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 121 (a) and FIG. 121 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 in the twentieth embodiment is formed in an elliptical shape in a front view. In other words, the transmission gear portion 20355 includes a first rotation region 20355a having a long distance from the rotation axis to the outer edge, and a second rotation region 20355b having a short distance from the rotation shaft to the outer edge.

  The first rotation area 20355a is formed such that the distance from the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (the second gear 352) to the outer edge thereof is from the end surface of the rack 332 in a state where the extending direction of the rack 332 is arranged parallel to the vertical direction. The distance is set to be longer than the distance to the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (the second gear 352).

  The second rotation region 20355b is formed such that the distance from the rotation axis of the transmission gear portion 20355 (the second gear 352) to the outer edge thereof is from the end face of the rack 332 in a state where the extending direction of the rack 332 is arranged parallel to the vertical direction. The distance from the transmission gear portion 20355 (second gear 352) to the rotation axis is substantially the same.

  As described above, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed on the rear side of the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be inclined with respect to the virtual line KJ1.

  Therefore, when the outer edge of the first rotation area 20355a is meshed with the tooth surface of the rack 332, the rack 332 is pushed out by the outer edge of the first rotation area 20355a and rotated about the slide shaft 332a. Is tilted (in the elevating body 330 shown in FIG. 121A, the upper end of the rack 332 is displaced to the left). On the other hand, when the outer edge of the first rotation area 20355a is meshed with the tooth surface of the rack 332, the extending direction of the rack 332 can be made parallel to the direction of gravity.

  In addition, the first rotation area 20355a is meshed with the tooth surface of the rack 332 when the elevating body 330 is located at the ascending position. Furthermore, the range where the first rotation area 20355a meshes with the tooth surface of the rack 332 is determined by the effect of the inertia force in the initial stage of driving when the lifting / lowering body 330 is driven. ) (The section in the extending direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 121 (b)) of the rack 332 in which the rack 332 is pushed out from the second gear 352 to the left in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 121 (b)). Is set.

  Here, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position as described above, the effect portion 331 is displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (the right side in FIG. 121 (b)) due to its inertial force. For this reason, there is a possibility that one of the effect parts 331 of the vertically arranged elevating body 330 collides with the other effect part 331.

  On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the transmission gear portion 20355 is formed to include the second rotation region 20355b, and the range where the second rotation region 20355b and the rack 332 mesh with each other drives the lifting / lowering body 330. Since the effect portion 331 is set to be longer than a section displaced to the right in the horizontal direction (the right side in FIG. 121 (b)) due to the inertia force at the initial stage of driving, one of the effects is produced when the elevating body 330 is driven. The part 331 can be prevented from colliding with the other effect part 331.

  In other words, since the elevating body 330 is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is displaced by the inertial force at the time of driving, when the elevating body 330 is driven, Direction)) can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it is possible to suppress one of the effect parts 331 from colliding with the other effect part 331.

  Therefore, in the twentieth embodiment, the above-described suppressing means biases the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member (the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 323) and away from the adjacent rack 332. By doing so, the effecting unit 331 is suppressed from approaching the adjacent effecting unit 331, so that the effecting unit 331 can be prevented from colliding with the adjacent effecting unit 331.

  More specifically, in the twentieth embodiment, the tooth surface of the transmission gear portion 20355 of the second gear 352 has a large-diameter tooth surface (first rotation area 20355a), and the large-diameter tooth surface (first rotation area 20355a) is a rack. By meshing with the rack 332, the rack 332 can be biased in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and in a direction away from the adjacent rack 332.

  That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even when the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the effect of inertia, the effect unit 331 is positioned adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the guide hole 323 is formed so as to extend in the direction of gravity has been described. However, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 has a curved first guide portion 21323a. It is formed in preparation. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b) are front views of the lifting / lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in the twenty-first embodiment. FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b) show a state in which the intermediate plate 353 and the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 have been removed. In FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b), the elevating body 330 is schematically illustrated, and the outer shapes of the guide hole 21323 and the slide shaft 332a are illustrated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 122 (a) and FIG. 122 (b), a virtual line KJ1 parallel to the direction of gravity and a virtual line KJ2 parallel to the extending direction of the rack 332 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the guide hole 21323 formed in the back cover 320 in the twenty-first embodiment is connected to a first guide portion 21323a formed to be curved at the upper end and the first guide portion 21323a. A second guide portion 21323b formed linearly below the guide portion 21323a is formed.

  The first guide portion 21323a is formed at an upper end portion of the guide hole 21323, and is formed in a shape that curves upward toward the second gear 352 (the transmission gear portion 355). The second guide portion 21323b is formed at a lower end portion of the guide hole 21323, and is formed in a straight line parallel to the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the slide shaft 332a protruding in a columnar shape is formed on the rear side of the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The slide shaft 332a is inserted into a guide hole 323 formed in the back cover 320. Thereby, the extending direction (virtual line KJ2) of the rack 332 can be inclined with respect to the virtual line KJ1.

  Therefore, when the slide shaft 332a of the rack 332 is slid (guided) inside the first guide portion 21323a, the slide shaft 332a is guided toward the second gear 352 (the transmission gear portion 355), so that the rack 332 is moved. The whole is pushed out to the second gear 352 side. Thus, the rack 332 is rotated around the slide shaft. Therefore, the rack 332 is in a tilted state (in the elevating body 330 shown in FIG. 122 (a), the upper end of the rack 332 is displaced horizontally left (FIG. 122 (a) left)).

  On the other hand, when the slide shaft 332a is guided inside the second guide portion 21323b, the extending direction of the rack 332 can be made parallel to the direction of gravity.

  Further, the slide shaft 332a is arranged inside the first guide portion 21323a when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position. Further, a range in which the slide shaft 332a slides inside the first guide portion 21323a is a section in which the rendering section 331 is displaced in the left-right direction due to an inertia force at the initial stage of driving when the elevating body 330 is driven. The length of the rack 332 is set to be longer than the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122B) of the rack 332 that is pushed out to the left in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 122B) from the second gear 352.

  Here, as described above, when the elevating body 330 is displaced downward from the ascending position, the effect portion 331 is displaced in the left-right direction due to its inertial force (in the elevating member 330 shown in FIG. 121, the effect portion 331 is displaced downward). Leftward). For this reason, there is a possibility that one of the effect parts 331 of the vertically arranged elevating body 330 collides with the other effect part 331.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 is formed with the first guide portion 21323a, and the range in which the slide shaft 332a slides on the first guide portion 21323a drives the elevating body 330. Since the effect portion 331 is set to be longer than the section in which the effect portion 331 is displaced in the left-right direction due to the inertia force at the initial stage of driving, one effect portion 331 is moved to the other effect portion 331 when the elevating body 330 is driven. Collision can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the elevating body 330 is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction in which the elevating body 330 is displaced by the inertial force when driven, when the elevating body 330 is driven, Can be narrowed. As a result, when the elevating body 330 is displaced, it is possible to suppress one of the effect parts 331 from colliding with the other effect part 331.

  Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, the above-described suppressing means biases the rack 332 in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member (the slide shaft 332a and the guide hole 21323) and away from the adjacent rack 332. By doing so, the effecting unit 331 is suppressed from approaching the adjacent effecting unit 331, so that the effecting unit 331 can be prevented from colliding with the adjacent effecting unit 331.

  More specifically, in the twenty-first embodiment, the guide hole 21323 is provided with an inclined groove (first guide portion 21323a), and the slide shaft 332a is positioned in the inclined groove (first guide portion 21323a). The rack 332 can be biased in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the 332a and the guide hole 21323) and in a direction away from the adjacent rack 332.

  That is, since the rack 332 can be separated from the adjacent rack 332 in advance, even when the rack 332 is close to the adjacent rack 332 due to the effect of inertia, the effect unit 331 is positioned adjacent to the adjacent effect unit 331. Collision can be suppressed.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described fifth embodiment, the case where a plurality of recesses 843 having the same shape are formed has been described. However, in the twenty-second embodiment, a recess 843 and a recess 22843 having a shape different from that of the recess 843 are formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a sectional view of a light emitting unit 800 according to the twenty-second embodiment. In FIG. 123 (a), the state where the decorative member 860 is removed is illustrated, and the substrate member 850 is illustrated by a broken line. FIG. 123A corresponds to the cross section of the light emitting unit 800 in FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 123 (a), virtual lines extend in the irradiation direction of each LED 852, and the respective regions partitioned by the respective virtual lines are shifted from the left side in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 123 (a)) to the first region. The symbols from SR1 to the fifth region SR5 are illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-second embodiment has a concave portion 843 formed in the center of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (a)). Third concave portions 22843 are formed at both ends in the direction.

  The third concave portion 22843 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction from the concave portion 843. That is, the third concave portion 22843 is formed such that its inner walls (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) extend in the vertical direction from the inner wall (the first side wall 843a and the second side wall 843) of the concave portion 843. .

  Further, the concave bottom surface of the third concave portion 22843 (the upper end surface in FIG. 123A) is set at the same height as the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 843. Therefore, the emission position (height) of the light emitted from the partition member 840 to the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 is set at the same height position in the third concave portion 22843 and the concave portion 843. .

  Thereby, even when the recessed distance is different between the third concave portion 22843 and the concave portion 843, it is not necessary to complicate the shapes of the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820. The formation of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be simplified.

  The substrate member 20850 provided in the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-second embodiment is formed from a first substrate 22850a and a second substrate 22850b.

  The first substrate 22850a has a third recess formed in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 123 (a) left and right direction) of the first substrate 22850a at two ends formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 123 (a) left and right direction) of the base member 847. 22843 is formed to be smaller than the facing distance, and is disposed at a position facing the concave portion 843 arranged in the center of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction.

  Further, the first substrate 22850a is provided with LEDs 852 at positions opposed to the respective center portions of the two concave portions 843 facing each other, and the light emitted from the LEDs 852 provided on the first substrate 22850a is Light can be made incident on the left and right central portions of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820.

  The second substrates 22850b are respectively provided at positions facing third concave portions 22843 formed at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 123A) of the partition member 22840. The second substrate 22850b is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the dimension between the opposing second side walls 22843b of the third recess 22843. Thereby, the second substrate 22850b can be disposed along the outer edge of the third concave portion 22843 on the opening side (the lower side in FIG. 123A).

  In addition, an LED 852 is formed on the second substrate 22850b at a position facing the center of the third concave portion 22843 facing the first concave portion 22843, and the first light is emitted from the LED 852 provided on the second substrate 22850b. The left and right ends of the light member 810 or the second light guide member 820 can emit light.

  Here, as described in the tenth embodiment, the light from the two LEDs 852 is located at the center in the left-right direction (from the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. Since the irradiation is performed, it is easy to secure the illuminance of the irradiated light.

  On the other hand, left and right ends (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 are left and right end portions of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. Since the light is emitted only by the light of one LED 852 disposed in the light emitting device, it is difficult to secure the illuminance of the irradiated light.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-second embodiment, the inner walls of the third recesses 22843 located at both ends in the row direction are more recessed (in the vertical direction in FIG. 123 (a)) than the recesses 843 located at the center. Formed long. Therefore, the area of the inner wall of the third concave portion 22843 can be increased accordingly.

  Therefore, light emitted from the LEDs 852 provided on the second substrate 22850b can be easily reflected by the inner walls (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third recess 22843. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of the light at the left and right ends (the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820.

  More specifically, the inner wall (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third concave portion 22843 is formed to be long in the recessed direction, so that the area for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 852 can be increased. Accordingly, the light of the LED 852 is applied to the inner wall (the first side wall 22843a and the second side wall 22843b) of the third concave portion 22843, and the first region SR1, SR5 side (the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820) is illuminated. Light can be easily condensed on the left and right ends).

  Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of light in the first region SR1 and the second region SR2 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.

  Next, a light emitting unit 800 according to a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the concave portion 843 having the same shape is formed has been described. However, in the 23rd embodiment, the concave portion 843 and the concave portion 22843 having a different shape from the concave portion 843 are formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123 (b) is a sectional view of a light emitting unit 800 according to the twenty-third embodiment. In FIG. 123 (b), a state where the decorative member 860 is removed is illustrated, and the substrate member 850 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, FIG. 123B corresponds to a cross section of the light emitting unit 800 in FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 123 (b), a virtual line extends in the irradiation direction of each LED 852, and each area partitioned by each virtual line is shifted from the left side in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 123 (b)) to the first area. The symbols from SR1 to the fifth region SR5 are illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), in the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-third embodiment, a concave portion 843 is formed in the center of the partition member 840 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)). Fourth concave portions 23843 are formed at both ends in the direction.

  The fourth concave portion 23843 is formed opposite to the first side wall 23843a formed in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 123 (b)) and in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)). And a side wall 23843b.

  The second side wall 23843b is spaced apart from the center in the left-right direction of the partition member 23843 in the left-right direction from the concave opening side (the lower side in FIG. 123 (b)) to the concave bottom side (the upper side in FIG. 123 (b)). It is formed to be inclined in the direction of

  The fourth concave portion 23843 has a concave bottom surface (FIG. 123 (b) upper surface) set to the same height as the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 843, and has a concave depth (FIG. 123 (b) vertical direction). Is set to be approximately the same as the depth of the recess 843.

  Further, the substrate member 23850 provided in the light emitting unit 800 in the twenty-third embodiment is formed from a first substrate 23850a and a second substrate 23850b.

  The length of the first substrate 23850a in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)) is formed smaller than the distance between two opposing fourth recesses 23840 formed at both ends in the left-right direction. Are arranged at positions facing the concave portions 843 arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

  Further, the first substrate 23850a is provided with LEDs 852 at positions opposed to the respective center portions of the two concave portions 843 facing each other, and the light emitted from the LEDs 852 provided on the first substrate 23850a is The central part in the left-right direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 can emit light.

  The second substrates 23850b are provided at positions facing the fourth concave portions 23843 formed at both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123A) of the partition member 23840, respectively. The second substrate 23850b is formed such that the dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the dimension between the opposing second side walls 23843b of the fourth recess 23843. This allows the second substrate 23850b to be disposed along the outer edge of the fourth recess 23843 on the opening side (the lower side in FIG. 123 (b)).

  Further, the second substrate 23850b is disposed such that an outer end portion in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123 (b)) of the partition member 22840 is inclined downward, and the inclination angle of the fourth concave portion 23843 is opposite. Of the second side wall 23843b.

  An LED 852 is provided on the second substrate 23850b, and the LED 852 is positioned on a straight line extending from the center position of the opposing second side wall 23843b of the fourth recess 23843 in the extending direction of the second side wall 23843b.

  That is, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the LED 852 provided on the second substrate 23850b is parallel to the extending direction of the fourth recess 23843. Thereby, the light of the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 23850b is transmitted to both ends (the first region SR1) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 in the extending direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 123B). And the fifth region SR5).

  Here, as described in the tenth embodiment, the light from the two LEDs 852 is located at the center in the left-right direction (from the second region SR2 to the fourth region SR4) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. Since the irradiation is performed, it is easy to secure the illuminance of the irradiated light.

  On the other hand, both ends (the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 in the extending direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 123B) are the first light guide member 810 or the fifth light guide member 820. Since the light is emitted only by the light of one LED 852 disposed at both ends of the second light guide member 820 in the extending direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 123B), it is difficult to secure the illuminance of the irradiated light.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, the second side wall 22843b of the fourth concave portion 23843 located at both ends in the row direction is formed to be inclined outward in the column direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 852 provided on the second substrate 23850b is reflected by the inner walls (the first side wall 23843a and the second side wall 23843b) of the fourth concave portion 23843, and the first light guide member 810 or the second Light can be easily applied to both left and right ends (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) of the light guide member 820.

  Also, since the second substrate 23850b is disposed to be inclined with respect to the end surfaces 811 and 821 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 23850b is Light can be easily irradiated to the left and right ends (the first region SR1 and the fifth region SR5) of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820.

  That is, in the twenty-third embodiment, the second side wall 22843b of the fourth concave portion 23843 located at both ends in the column direction is inclined toward the outside of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, and Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 852 disposed on the second substrate 23850b is directed to the outside of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820, the horizontal direction of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 is set. (FIG. 123 (b) left and right directions) Both ends (first region SR1 and fifth region SR5) can be easily irradiated with light.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the illuminance of light in the first region SR1 and the second region SR2 of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820. As a result, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the rendering unit 331 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the upper ends of the board member 390 and the outer frame 360 are not connected (fastened or engaged) has been described. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the upper ends of the board member 390 and the outer frame 360 are not connected. Will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 124 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering unit 331 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering unit 331 along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124A corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 124, a projecting portion 24361b is formed on the outer frame 360 of the rendering portion 331 in the twelfth embodiment. The protruding portion 24361b is formed so as to protrude from the inner edge of the upper end of the outer edge portion 361, and is located on the front side (left side in FIG. 124 (a)) of the substrate member 390.

  Further, a dummy chip 24395 is arranged on the upper end of the substrate member 390. The dummy chip 24395 is formed to include a main body 24395a formed in a cubic shape and L-shaped legs 24395b protruding from both side surfaces of the main body 24395a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124B). .

  The dummy chip 24395 is different from a control chip (not shown) that controls light emission of the first LED 391 or the second LED 392 provided on the board member 390, and does not conduct with the first LED 391 or the second LED 392 provided on the board member 390. Formed. That is, the power is not supplied to the dummy chip 24395.

  The main body portion 24395a is disposed at a distance of a distance Z1 (see FIG. 124 (b)) from a front side surface of the board member 390 except for the first LED 391 and the second LED 392.

  The legs 24395b are formed from a metal material. One end of the leg portion 24395b is protruded from the side surface of the main body portion 24395a, and the leg portion 24395b is bent toward the substrate member 390 at the center and the other end is connected to the substrate member 390. The above-described distance dimension Z1 can be adjusted by the dimension up to the bent portion on one end side. One end of the leg portion 24395b is fixed (connected) to the front surface of the substrate member 390 by soldering.

  The thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 124B) of the protruding portion 24361b is set to a dimension Z2 (see FIG. 124B) having a thickness smaller than the distance dimension Z1 (Z1> Z2). ).

  Further, the projecting position of the projecting portion 24361b in the front-back direction is set inside the dummy chip 24395 of the board member 390 in the assembled state. Further, the width dimension of the protruding portion 24361b in the left-right direction is set to be smaller than the opposing dimension of one side portion (the side connected to the substrate 390) of the protruding portion 24361b formed on the left and right sides of the main body portion 24395a. You.

  Further, the position of the projecting distal end of the projecting portion 24361b inward in the radial direction is set radially inward of the outer frame 360 relative to the dummy chip 24395 in the rendered portion 331 in the assembled state.

  Therefore, the projecting portion 24361b can be arranged in a region surrounded by the main body portion 24395a and the leg portion 24395b of the dummy chip 24395. That is, the dummy chip 24395 and the projecting portion 24361b can be brought into a state of being engaged.

  Therefore, since the upper end side of the board member 390 can be engaged with the outer frame 360, rattling when the interposition member 335 (the board member 390) rattles can be suppressed.

  That is, by forming an engaging portion (dummy chip 24395 and projecting portion 24361b) for engaging the interposing member 335 (substrate member 390) with the outer frame 360 on the open side of the base portion 334, the interposing member 335 is formed. When the (substrate member 390) rattles, the rattling can be suppressed by the engagement portion.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the engaging portion (dummy chip 24395) on the board member 390 side is formed by a chip that does not control the first LED 391 or the second LED 392, and the engagement of the board controls the board member 390. Can be prevented from malfunctioning or being damaged.

  Further, since the dummy chip 24395 and the substrate member 390 are fixed (connected) by solder, the dummy chip 24395 can be provided when the first LED 891 or the second LED 892 is fixed to the substrate member 390 by solder.

  That is, the dummy chip 24395 can be fixed to the substrate member 390 during the step of soldering the first LED 891 and the second LED 892. Therefore, the formation of the engagement portion when forming the engagement portion at the upper end portion of the interposition member 335 can be simplified. As a result, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Further, since the engaging portions (the dummy chip 24395 and the projecting portion 24361b) can be formed on the front surface of the interposed member 335 (the substrate member 390) and the back surface of the outer frame 360, the engaging portion is formed by the interposed member 335. Projection to the back side of (substrate member 390) can be suppressed.

  Therefore, in the portion where the base portion 334 is not overlapped (opened portion), it is possible to suppress the effect portion 331 from increasing toward the rear side. Therefore, the space required for disposing the base member 310 and the elevating body 330 can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, a description will be given of an elevating body 330 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 373 of the lens portion 370 and the fastening portion 334b of the base portion 334 are fastened only at the lower end portion is described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the lens portion 370 and the base portion 334 are fastened. Are also fastened to portions other than the lower end. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the elevating body 330 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, FIG. 126 (a) is a rear view of the elevating body 330, and FIG. 126 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the elevating body 330. is there. Note that FIG. 126B corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, a second fastening portion 25373 protruding radially outward from the outer edge of the upright portion 371 is formed in the lens portion 370 of the elevating body 330 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

  The second fastening portion 25373 is formed on both sides in the left-right direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction) of the lens portion 370, and its height position in the up-down direction (FIG. 126 (b) up-down direction) is in the front-rear direction with the base portion 334. Is set to a height that overlaps That is, it is below the lens unit 370.

  The second fastening portion 25373 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the rear, and includes a second fastening hole 25373a that penetrates in a circular shape in the front-rear direction.

  In the base portion 334, a second protruding portion 25334b is formed at a position facing the axis of the second fastening hole 25373a and protrudes in a columnar shape toward the lens portion 370 (to the left in FIG. 126 (b)). . A second insertion hole 25334b1 that penetrates in a circular shape is formed on the axis of the second protruding portion 25334b.

  Therefore, the tip of the screw can be screwed into the second fastening hole 25373a by inserting the tip of the screw from the back side of the base portion 334 through the second insertion hole 25334b1. Therefore, the second fastening portion 25373 of the lens portion 370 and the second fastening portion 334b of the base portion 334 can be fastened.

  The base portion 334 is formed with a second projection 25334a projecting from the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left and right direction) in front view (left side in FIG. 126 (b)) from the front view (FIG. 126 (b)). b)). The second protrusion 25334a is set to have a length such that the protruding tip thereof comes into contact with the back side of the substrate member 390. The second protrusion 25334a has a protruding tip surface formed in a hemispherical shape. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the formation of the protrusion 334a described in the eleventh embodiment is omitted.

  The second protrusion 25334a is set at a position lower than a substantially central position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 126 (b)) of the substrate member 390 in the assembled state of the elevating body 330, and in the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a)). The position in the left-right direction is set substantially at the center of the base portion 334 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126A).

  The second protrusion 25334b is located above the second protrusion 25334a in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 126 (b)). Further, the projecting distance of the second protrusion 25334b and the fastening part 334b toward the board member 390 (left side in FIG. 126 (b)) is shorter than the projecting distance of the second protrusion 25334a toward the board member 390. It is formed.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the rear side of the substrate 390 is supported at one point of the second protrusion 25334a, and the lens part 370 is fastened to the base part 334 at three points. Further, in a front view (or a rear view), the contact position of the second protrusion 25334a with the substrate member 390 is set inside a region surrounded by three points where the lens unit 370 and the base portion 334 are fastened.

  Accordingly, the projecting distance of the second protruding portion 25334b and the fastening portion 334b is shorter than that of the second projection 25334a, and therefore, the second projecting portion 25334b is inserted through the second insertion hole 25334b1 of the second projecting portion 25334b and the insertion hole 334b of the fastening portion 334b. By adjusting the screw tightening amount, it is possible to change the state in which the lens unit 370 tilts with respect to the outer frame 360.

  For example, by loosely tightening a screw that penetrates the second insertion hole 25334b1 of the second projecting portion 25334b and strongly tightening a screw that penetrates the insertion hole 334b of the fastening portion 334b, the interposition member 335 (the lens portion 370) is tightened. , The lower end portions of the partition member 380 and the substrate member 390). Therefore, the upper end side of the interposition member 334 can be pressed against the outer frame 360 around the second protrusion 25334a as a shaft. As a result, rattling of the interposition member 335 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the pressing force of the upper end portion of the interposition member 335 against the outer frame 360 can be adjusted by the amount of screw tightening. When the installation member 335 rattles to the outer frame 360, the rattling can be suppressed only by adjusting the fastening force of the screw. Therefore, it is not necessary to replace parts when the interposition member 335 rattles, so that cost can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion at the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and opens the sphere supply side. The opposite side may operate in a lidded manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than a sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 is rotated while abutting on the first passage forming member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, product costs can be reduced by reducing the number of components required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the one-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a case where the rack for driving the drive side slide member 420 is composed of two layers in the front and rear, and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the front rack and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the rear rack May be configurable. In this case, by adopting a mode in which only one of the two-layered racks abuts on the driven side slide member 430 vertically, the case where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between a case where the drive side slide member 420 moves up and down independently by passing through the driven side slide member 430.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outside the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center side of a circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended longer by that amount.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that is in contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape is formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the abutting portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially shaving the gear teeth of the portion configured in the tooth shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b contacts the surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area per surface may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the left and right ascent control members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive side slide member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the right and left elevation restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to one of the left and right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the distal end wall member 2560 is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is provided, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 and a ball is attracted by magnetic force Alternatively, a mode in which the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is vibrated in the rotation direction may be used. In this case, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end in the release state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end and the front end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, if a ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be retained at an intermediate portion (a position closer to the distal end than the base end), so that the communication state changes. In this case, it is possible to shorten a period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the lowering control member 415 and the upward control member 417 are provided on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side in the front view is greater than the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left side in the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that changes the posture of the driven side slide member 3430 in the counterclockwise direction (in the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 disposed on the right side is used. While suppressing, when the driven slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise in front view due to a sudden vertical movement of the driven slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 falls after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is located at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control of repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed such that the driving-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, an effect can be performed in which the driven side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive side slide member 420 (such as repeatedly rebounded).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The split member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is connected to one side. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied from the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member to the division member DV (the rotation member 640).

  In each of the above embodiments, the period in which the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 Although the case where the period in which the DV is engaged with the driven portion 641 overlaps has been described (see FIG. 75), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or another While one of the engagement portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, the other is not engaged, and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is not engaged. One of the engagement portions 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 and the other of the engagement portions 638b may be made to be non-engaged while the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid that the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, when a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 due to a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, a driving tolerance of the driving motor 631, etc. In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs endlessly, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. If a phase shift occurs in a state in which the rotary member 640 is engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is in a compressed state and the other section is in a tensile state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. Becomes

  On the other hand, as described above, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. By doing so, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid that the rotating member 640 is affected by the phase shift. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement thereof can be stabilized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the division members DV are connected endlessly in the rotating unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The division members DV are connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). It is of course possible to connect the divided member DV up to and disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the divided member DV connected in an end shape may be displaced (moved) along the endless trajectory in each of the above embodiments, or may be displaced along the endless trajectory. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the virtual line KS5 is formed non-parallel to the virtual line KS4 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the virtual line KS5 is parallel to the virtual line KS4. May be formed. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 852 can be focused on one side, and the width of the concave portion 6843 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 852 is made incident on the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the extending direction of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 (in the direction of the virtual line KS1). ).

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the second side wall 9843b is formed in a curved shape protruding toward the inside of the concave portion 9843 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second side wall 9843b may be formed in a curved shape protruding toward the outside of the concave portion 9843.

  In this case, light emitted from the LED 852 to the second side wall 9852 can be reflected by the curved surface of the second side wall 9852 and can be easily collected. As a result, the light of the LED 852 applied to the second side wall 9852 can be easily collected at the connection (boundary) between the incident surfaces 812 and 821 and the end surfaces 811 and 821.

  As a result, of the light emitted from the LED 852, the light emitted to the second side wall 9843b is made to enter the inside of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820, and the first light guide member 810 and the It can be easily diffused in the direction in which the two light guide members 820 extend (the direction of the virtual line KS1).

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the second concave portion 10843 is formed only in the left and right outer ends of the partition member 840 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, all the concave portions 843 may be the second concave portions 10843. In this case, it is preferable that the second side wall 843b of the second concave portion 10843 be formed to be longer in the front-rear direction than the second side wall 843b located outside the partition member 840 in the left-right direction than the second side wall located inside.

  According to this, the light of the LED 852 that has entered the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 is directed to both outer sides of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 at the center position in the left-right direction. It can be easily turned. As a result, the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can easily emit light uniformly.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the predetermined gap R3 is formed between the opposed portion 332b of the rack 332 and the bulging portion 15353a is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the dimension of the gap R3 is eliminated and the lifting body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the side surface of the contacted portion 332b may be in contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 15353a (R1 = R2).

  In this case, in the state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the displacement of the rendering unit 331 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when the displacement in the left-right direction acts on the pachinko machine 10, the rendering unit 331 is displaced. It is possible to prevent one of the effect units 331 from colliding with the other effect unit 331.

  In the above-described twenty-third embodiment, the case where the second side wall 23843b of the fourth concave portion 23843 and the second substrate 23850b are disposed in an inclined manner has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the substrate member 850 according to the fifth embodiment may be provided on the second side wall 23843b of the fourth recess 23843. Further, the concave portion 843 in the fifth embodiment may be formed in the substrate member 23850.

  In this case, light is applied to both left and right ends (first region SR1 and second region SR2) of the first light guide member 810 or the second light guide member 820 due to the inclination of either the fourth concave portion 23843 or the substrate member 23850. Can be easily collected. Therefore, the illuminance of the first light guide member 810 and the second light guide member 820 can be easily made uniform throughout.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the projecting portion 24361b is arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 24395a and the leg portion 24395b of the dummy chip 24395 has been described, but the outer surface of the projecting portion 24361b is formed by the body of the dummy chip 24395. It may be in contact with the part 24395a or the leg part 24395b.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the dummy chip 24395 is fixed to the substrate member 390 in a state where the wiring is not connected (non-conductive) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, for example, the emission of the first LED 391 may be controlled. In this case, since the dummy chip 24395 and the projecting portion 24361b are engaged with each other, for example, when there is a player who forcibly removes the board member 390 from the elevating body 330 and acts improperly, The detachment of the dummy chip 24395 makes it impossible for the first LED 391 to emit light, and makes it easier for the store manager to notice the misconduct.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit; a transmitting member for transmitting a driving force of the driving unit; The member includes a first gear and a second gear meshed with the first gear and disposed on the displacement member side of the transmission path of the driving force with respect to the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact with the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by being in contact with the gaming machine A1.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine including a driving unit, a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving unit, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is raised and lowered between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption for holding the displacement member at the raised position increases. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight. A known structure is also known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased in size by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes the contact portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the contact of the first gear when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear contacting the portion, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is It is possible to suppress falling by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when the displacement member is held at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member at the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the size of the transmission member can be reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the second gear contacts the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A2 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises. That is, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both the forward and reverse directions. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in a direction to lower the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and by rotating the first gear by the driving force of the driving means, The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member attempts to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut against the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and displacing the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth tip surface.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member. The second gear is formed so as to be lower than the teeth of the first gear so that a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth surface of the first gear. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in a direction to raise the displacement member through the abutment portion and the meshing of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a greater tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position can be reduced (the tolerance is increased). As a result, a state where the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear can be reliably formed.

  Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is increased, strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tip surface is curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, while improving the strength of the first gear, the first gear can be rotated until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in a direction to lower the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with a contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined gear of the second gear is moved. The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed by setting the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from descending by its own weight.

  In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of a tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the first gear is provided on a receiving portion of the second gear. The gaming machine A7, wherein the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the contact portion of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth shape, and the first gear is in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position. Since the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the receiving portion of the second gear is moved to the displacement member. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first gear has a concave portion. When the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are curved. The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function of the stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged at the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be increased. This can prevent the receiving portion of the second gear from being damaged when receiving the contact portion of the first gear.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in a rising direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are not provided. Is disengaged and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is elevated. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. Thereby, the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact part of the first gear (the contact part (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other; A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member; and a first passage member and a second passage member in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members are not communicated with each other, the first and second passage members are displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a connecting member that connects one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by contacting the other of the two passage members.

  Here, a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are non-connected. There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state to be communicated (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that a variation occurs in a stop position and a disposition position of the second passage member when the first passage member is displaced due to a dimensional tolerance and an assembly tolerance of each component. Therefore, in the communication state, a position shift occurs between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, and it is difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine B1 is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by contacting the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Since the first and second passage members include a connecting member that communicates between one ends of the first and second passage members, even if the positions of the first and second passage members are misaligned, one end of each of the first and second passage members is displaced. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, with the displacement of the first passage member, the first passage member comes into contact with the connection member and displaces the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force to be performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged to face each other across an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion includes: When the first path member is located on the displacement path of the first path member and the first path member is displaced, and the other end of the first path member or the second path member contacts one side wall of the connection member. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member comes into contact with one side wall of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, in the communication state, the one side wall and the other side wall of the connecting member are removed. , The one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member, and the positional deviation between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof being a rotation tip side, and the connection member is provided with a rotating shaft parallel to a rotating shaft of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, and The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall of the connection member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage member. Since a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be performed smoothly. In addition, by utilizing the rotation operations of both, the other side wall of the connection member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a sphere from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, which is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball in a communicating portion between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member is a portion in which the positional deviation becomes large, where the feeding of the ball becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. Since the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the throwing ball can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to move. A gaming machine B5 comprising: a throwing regulation means for regulating that a ball is thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the release state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other. When the ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall outside the game area. In the communicating state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the game area may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear and the crank mechanism may be hindered, or the movable member may be damaged by being caught by the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member. At the same time, in the released state, there is provided a ball feed restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first path member. For example, when a ball is supplied to the first path member in the released state, Also, even when the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state while the ball stays in the first passage member, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, the cover body allowing passage of the ball in the communicating state and restricting the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body is configured to restrict the throwing of the ball. A gaming machine B6 forming means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, a cover as one of the ball-throwing restricting means is provided at one end of the first passage member so as to allow the passage of the ball in the communicating state and restrict the passage of the ball in the released state. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the first passage The ball can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that regulates the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. And a functioning member for displacing the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass when at least the communication state is established.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, since the urging member is provided to apply an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the ball, the cover in the released state is provided. Inadvertent displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing the ball to pass, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the ball to pass is performed in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body It can also be used as a driving means for causing the product cost to be reduced.

  The action member is located on the displacement trajectory of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and comes into contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. (For example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to a game board, etc.) and a driving force of a driving means for displacing the first passage member. To the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts drive means and driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits the same to the cover body) ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in such a state that one end of the first passage member is uppermost in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in the released state with one end of the first passage member at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is transferred from the communicating state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. Falling can be suppressed.

  In the release state, the first passage member disposed such that one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position does not need to be entirely inclined upward. There may be a part of the area which is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means is configured to arrange the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from one end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the ball is supplied from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case where the communication state is formed, it is possible to form a state in which the whole of the first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to one end, so that the ball can be easily sent from the first passage member to the second passage member. In this way, the ball can be prevented from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing a ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A distributing member that is displaced between the other side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, wherein the case body is formed by opening both sides in the displacement direction of the distributing member. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open, so that the case body is moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when the ball flows down between the distribution member displaced toward the case and the case body, it is possible to suppress the flowed-down ball from being caught between the distribution member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position; The gaming machine B11, wherein, when the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the other side position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, if the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is displaced due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is set. The ball is distributed to the first passage member in (1) (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement state between the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if the control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member always moves to the other side position). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

  In the gaming machine B11, the gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the first passage member includes a wall section that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall section of the first passage member is the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member has a wall portion that defines a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. In addition, parts can be shared and the cost of parts can be reduced. In addition, by using the wall portion that partitions the passage through which the ball passes as the sorting member, the sorted ball can flow down to the passage without fail.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for restricting the rebound of the driven slide member 430 is an example>
A guide member extending vertically, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and supporting the displacement member at the descending position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the lifting member as the lifting member is raised. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the rising direction. A gaming machine C1 comprising a rise regulating member for regulating displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the up-down direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and supporting the displacing member at the descending position A supporting member and a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowering position to the upper position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member with the raising of the raising and lowering member, There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as a lifting member is lowered (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained on the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the descending position because the displacing member is provided with the elevation regulating member for regulating the displacement of the displacing member in the ascending direction when the displacing member is lowered to the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be restricted, and rattling due to disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C1, there is provided an urging means for urging the elevation regulating member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the elevation regulation member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion for displacing the lift restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position, and A gaming machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion that engages.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is configured to displace the rising regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a descent position. In this case, since the movable member is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the rising restricting member, the restricted state by the rising restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to its lowered position by its own weight, and the restricted state by the rising restricting member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving source for performing the operation. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost of the product can be reduced.

  In addition, since the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the displacement regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member, the engagement between the rising regulating member and the engaging portion is accordingly made. The force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engagement portion.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement of the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Can be suppressed from being inadvertently disengaged from the engaging portion of the upward movement restricting member and the displacing member.

  In addition, since the release of the engagement between the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement, and The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the lift restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost. .

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, the engagement portion between the elevation restriction member and the displacement member In the state where the lifting member may rise and push up the displacement member in a state where the engagement of the displacement member is not released, according to the gaming machine C3, the release of the engagement between the lifting restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is canceled. This can be performed in accordance with the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member to displace the ascending restricting member. A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement of the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force at the time of pushing up the displacement member as the lifting member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. Therefore, it is necessary to make the engagement state such that it can be released, and it becomes difficult to firmly engage. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating restricting member when the elevating member is raised, thereby displacing the elevating restricting member, thereby restricting the ascent. Since there is provided a release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, even if the rising regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since the strong engagement state can be formed, the play of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. Further, the vibration due to the recoil when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released, the elevation regulating member is configured to move the displacement member up and down between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 to be abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift regulating member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the elevating member.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in the gaming machine C5, a lifting regulating member abutting on the lifting member is urged by the urging means in a direction approaching the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C5, the lifting regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction approaching the elevating member. And the posture can be stabilized. Also, rattling of the lifting member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine C6, a drive unit, a pinion rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack meshed with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, the elevating member, A gaming machine C7, wherein the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. You. In this case, the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevating member, so that the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is reduced, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction to increase the interval, while the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion increases. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the distance between the members increases. Therefore, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to suppress the tooth resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a gaming machine C8 including a descent regulating member that regulates displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position, the lowering member is provided to regulate the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and the elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, a driving force for holding the displacement member at the ascending position can be made unnecessary, so that energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the regulation by the descending member is performed by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the regulation by the descending member, and the driving source for elevating the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the regulation by the descending regulating member is performed by lowering the elevating member. The gaming machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the restriction. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the lifting member can be used also as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member is separately provided, for example, when the restriction by the descent restricting member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure, the elevating member moves down and drives. Where the overload may act on the source or the descent regulating member may be damaged, according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the descent regulating member can be released in synchronization with the descending operation of the elevating member. When the elevating member is lowered, a state in which the restriction by the descent restricting member is surely released can be formed.

  In the case where the lowering regulating member is a structure that restricts displacement of the displacement member in the lowering direction instead of the raising and lowering member, a structure in which the restriction by the lowering restricting member is released with the lowering of the raising and lowering member is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent restricting member has a structure for restricting the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is regulated by the descending member, the ascent member is in contact with the elevating member, and the descending member is in contact with the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the contacting direction is different from the direction in which the elevation regulating member contacts the elevation member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the descent regulating member contacts the elevating member is different from the direction in which the ascent regulating member contacts the elevating member. The rattling of the lifting member in different directions can be suppressed by the restriction member and the lifting restriction member. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C10, a drive unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion are provided, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member. A gaming machine C11, which is in contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the descending regulating member abuts on the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, the displacement of the rack (elevating member) with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack can be restricted.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state in which the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the lift regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. , A gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rising regulating member and the supporting member are on one side and the other side of the guiding member. Are arranged so as to be able to abut against the displacement member, so that rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member in one direction or the other side is regulated by the abutment member or the support member, respectively. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rising restriction member abut on the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed as possible, and the support member is disposed above the elevation restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. The displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacement member while being different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation regulating member, the support member does not hinder the elevation of the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to elevate can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom of design can be secured.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a movable member movably formed and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged at irregular intervals along the moving direction of the moving member. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detected parts provided; and a plurality of detection sensors disposed on a movement locus of the detected part.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine including a rotatable moving member and a detecting unit for detecting a rotational position of the moving member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes the plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit arranged to face each other with the slit interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means includes a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and a plurality of detected portions arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detecting sensors, and the past detecting result of the detecting sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the detected portion is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion Is disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the arrangement intervals of the divided members. Therefore, each time the movable member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which means that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members have an interval smaller than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members in the first section, and a movement locus of the detected portion in the first section A gaming machine D3, which is disposed above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are larger than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. Space required for disposing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, there is no need to consider the space for disposing the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set to be smaller. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

  In the gaming machine D3, the division member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of the adjacent division members. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, wherein the end of the gaming machine D4 is restricted from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between adjacent divided members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D3, both ends of the divided member can be displaced to the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member. Further, the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the distance between the adjacent divided members is restricted, so that the detection in the direction of increasing the distance is performed. Variations in the position of the part can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body member and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member to cause the main body member and the adjacent main body member to be displaced. A gaming machine D5 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guiding portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion that guides the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by a link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. The gaming machine D6, wherein the gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape having a width corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member. The portion is formed in a groove shape slidably inserted, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, so that the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, since it is possible to reliably restrict displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, it is possible to suppress variation in the position of the detection target in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, abuts against a main body member of the adjacent division member. The gaming machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and displacement of the divided member in a direction to reduce a distance between adjacent divided members is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. The displacement member is displaced to a position where it abuts on the main body member, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of narrowing the gap with the adjacent divided member is regulated. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval; and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A gaming machine E1 wherein a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and an interval in which the plurality of divided members is smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each of the divided members, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the moving member while securing the number of displayed identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the division member includes a main body member, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of adjacent division members, wherein the link member includes the main body member and the main body member. A gaming machine E2 wherein the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent dividing member. Since the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, the first section and the second section are formed. Can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member, and the main body member and the adjacent A gaming machine E3 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture tilted toward an adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright posture than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, in the first section, the displacement member is in a posture inclined toward the adjacent divided member, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. In the first section, the space between the divided members is widened, so that a space for the tilting of the displacement member can be secured, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a more upright posture than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member. To reduce the distance between them. That is, the second interval in the second section can be reduced. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. Gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, is higher than the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member. Since it is provided, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be further reduced. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, since the trajectory of the main body guide of the base member is formed in a circular shape, a structure for displacing the main body member guided by the main body guide of the base member. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equal to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which a plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members in a circumferential direction connected at a second interval which is smaller than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter, referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter, referred to as “the latter”). Can be shortened in the circumferential direction, so that the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the orbits of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members of the first section in the former case, based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section, the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member is determined. Recall fewer numbers than.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the plurality of divided members are formed. Since the radius is equal to the radius of a circular connection at the first interval, the number of the plurality of divided members is secured, and the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to remind the player of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which the guide portion is extended, a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member. A driving unit, wherein the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set a gap between the split members to a first interval, and a first guide portion that sets the interval between the split members to a first interval. A second guide portion for setting the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the split member, and The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating a member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the moving member has a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a section smaller than the first interval. By forming a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval of the interval, compared with a case where the entirety is connected at the first interval, while maintaining the number of divided members, The space required for arranging the divided members can be suppressed. That is, when identifying information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought.

  However, a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval is connected to the moving member to which the plurality of divided members are connected, and the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to displace such a moving member with respect to the base member while forming a section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and the first guide portion sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval, and is smaller than the first interval. A second guide for setting an interval between the divided members at the second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided member, and the rotary drive member is Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the portions while being engaged with the divided members, the intervals between the divided members are wide and narrow (the first interval The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval) in the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the rotating drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the rotational drive member is formed with a plurality of engaging portions, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotational drive member to the moving member. Can be.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members endlessly in the circumferential direction, and the driving unit includes two of the rotation driving members, A gaming machine F3, wherein driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotary drive members are provided at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, and thus are provided from the rotary drive member to the moving member. Driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the bias of the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the two rotation driving members cause the phases of the circular trajectories to differ by 180 degrees. Gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is disposed at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the orbit of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member is circular, and the two rotary driving members are circular orbits. Are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase with each other, so that the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to two of the moving members (the plurality of divided members) which are most separated from each other. Thus, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotary drive member is configured such that while the engagement portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of the other rotary drive member is not engaged. A gaming machine F5, wherein the engaging portions are arranged with different phases so as to be engaged with the division member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are connected to each other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the divided member. Since the phases of the engagement portions are arranged to be different from each other so that the engagement portions of the rotation drive member are engaged with the divided members, the engagement portions of one rotation drive member and the other rotation drive members are arranged. It is possible to avoid that the engaging portion and the splitting member are simultaneously disengaged from each other, and it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member is intermittent, the division and the transmission of the driving force and the release are performed. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the entire moving member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, one of the engagement portion of the one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the split member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members endlessly, the posture thereof can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which an engaging portion of the rotation driving unit is engaged, and the engaged portion is a track of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotary drive unit is engaged, and Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotary drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the driving torque applied from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation drive member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the division member guided along a first guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, the divided members are separated from each other. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the distance is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary driving member can be suppressed, and the rotary driving member is accordingly reduced. Can be increased in diameter. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member displaced along the guide portion, thereby reducing the interval between the divided members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation drive member is configured to be attached to the divided member guided along a third guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F8, wherein the gaming machine F8 is provided at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent divided portion. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion is provided. The division member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation driving member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from being bent in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end rotatably connected to the main body member and a main body member of an adjacent divided member. A link member whose end is slidably connected, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively, so that the split member and The distance between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotation drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and is located at a position where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9, wherein one end of the link member is also engaged at a position close to a portion to which the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member having the other end slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thereby, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion where the link member is rotatably connected, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion. When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears which are arranged concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and are respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears provided with the two rotation driving members are provided, the two rotation driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it was done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are moved by the moving member (the plurality of divided members) in a front view of the base member. Can be arranged inward of the outer circumference of the movement trajectory. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the light emitting unit 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmitting member, a side of the light irradiating means closer to the light transmitting member A partition member that partitions a space up to an end surface, wherein the partition member is configured such that at least a part of an inner wall that partitions the space is non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front of the light transmitting member. Gaming machine G1.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine including a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material, and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. H11-163873). 2006-218093). A plurality of dots are formed in the light transmitting member, and the light incident from the side end surface is reflected by the dots, so that the light can be emitted from the front.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that light incident on the light transmitting member tends to be biased to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiating means, and it is difficult to make the illuminance of the light transmitting member uniform. there were. That is, since the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member from the light irradiating unit is concentrated in the direction along the optical axis of the light irradiating unit, the light spreads along the front surface of the light transmitting member (the thickness direction of the light transmitting member). And the light irradiating means in the direction perpendicular to both directions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, there is provided a partition member for partitioning a space from the light irradiating means to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the partition member has at least a part of an inner wall for partitioning the space. Since it is non-parallel and non-orthogonal to the front of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiation means and reflected on the inner wall of the partition member spreads along the front of the light transmitting member (the thickness of the light transmitting member). (A direction orthogonal to both the direction and the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the light transmitting member from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiation unit. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform.

  In the gaming machine G1, the partition member includes a base member interposed between the light irradiating means and a side end surface of the light transmitting member and having an opening opened at a position corresponding to the light irradiating means. The gaming machine G2, wherein an inner wall of an opening of the base member defines a space from the light irradiating means to a side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the partitioning member is interposed between the light irradiating means and the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and has an opening at a position corresponding to the light irradiating means. A base member to be opened, and the inner wall of the opening of the base member defines a space from the light irradiating means to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the partition member (the inner wall of the opening) reflects light, By causing the light to travel in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis of the light irradiating means, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing the deviation of the light incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G2, in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation unit, the base member and the opening are each formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and the opening has each side parallel to each side of the base member. The gaming machine G3, wherein the gaming machine G3 is arranged in a posture in which the light transmitting member is inclined with respect to the opening.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine G2, the base member and the opening are each formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and the opening is formed so that each side has a side of the base member when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means. Since the light transmitting member is disposed in a posture inclined with respect to the opening, the inner wall of the opening is non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front of the light transmitting member. And the moldability of the partition member (base member) can be ensured. That is, when the base member is molded from a resin material, the openings are arranged in such a manner that each side is parallel to each side of the base member, so that the thickness of the base member is made uniform, and accordingly, , Sink, warpage, poor filling, etc. can be suppressed. As a result, moldability can be ensured.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G2, at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a convex curved surface when the base member is viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation unit.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G2, the base member is formed such that at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a convex curved surface when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means. Light emitted from the irradiating means can be easily reflected and reflected on the convex curved surface. Therefore, the light can be easily transmitted in the direction spreading along the front surface of the light transmitting member (the direction perpendicular to both the thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis direction of the light irradiating means). Light incident on the member can be suppressed from being deviated to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiation unit. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform.

  The gaming machine G5, wherein in the gaming machine G2, at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a concave curved surface when the base member is viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation unit.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G2, the base member is formed such that at least a part of the inner wall of the opening is formed as a concave curved surface when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation means. By reflecting the light irradiated from the irradiation means on the concave curved surface, it is possible to condense the light in one direction. That is, the light converging direction is deviated in a direction expanding along the front of the light transmitting member (a direction orthogonal to both the thickness direction of the light transmitting member and the optical axis direction of the light irradiating means). Light incident on the transmission member can be suppressed from being deviated to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiation unit. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform.

  In the gaming machine G5, at least three or more of the light irradiating means are provided, and the light irradiating means are arranged in a row at predetermined intervals. The base member has the opening at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of light irradiating means. The opening is opened, and the opening located at one end in the row direction and the opening located at the end on the other side in the row direction are oriented in such a manner that the centers of the recesses are directed to opposite sides. A gaming machine G6, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5, at least three or more light irradiating means are provided, and the light irradiating means are arranged in a row at a predetermined interval. An opening is opened at a position corresponding to each, and an opening located at one end in the row direction and an opening located at the other end in the row direction are arranged such that the centers of the recesses are opposite to each other. The illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform as a whole since the light transmitting member is disposed in the facing posture.

  That is, in the region between the openings, light travels from each of the adjacent openings (that is, light from the two light irradiation means arrives), so that the light overlaps and the illuminance is secured. Cheap. On the other hand, in a region outside the opening located at one end or the other end in the arrangement direction, only light from the opening travels (that is, only light from one light irradiation unit reaches). ), It is difficult to secure the illuminance.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G6, the opening located at one end in the row direction and the opening located at the other end in the row direction have the concave centers facing the opposite sides. Therefore, the condensed light can be made to travel toward a region outside each opening, and illuminance can be secured. As a result, the illuminance of the light transmitting member can be easily made uniform throughout.

<About the concept of the invention in which the upper lifting unit 300 is an example>
A game in which a pair of displacement units each having a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit is provided, and the pair of displacement units are arranged with the displacement trajectories of the displacement members adjacent to each other. The gaming machine H1 further comprising a suppression unit that suppresses the displacement member from approaching an adjacent displacement member due to an inertial force when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit.

  Here, a pair of displacement units having a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit is provided, and the pair of displacement units are disposed so that the displacement trajectories of the displacement members are adjacent to each other. A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-11899). According to such a gaming machine, an effect of displacing both displacement members in the same direction while juxtaposing them, or an effect of displacing only one displacement member can be performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the displacement is started by receiving the driving force from the driving means, the displacement members are displaced in a direction approaching the adjacent displacement members due to the influence of the inertia force, and the displacement members are displaced from each other. There was a problem that there was a risk of collision. If the spacing between the displacement units is increased to avoid collision of the displacement members, not only does the disposition space increase, but also, for example, a sense of unity when displacing the two displacement members in the same direction while juxtaposing them. Cannot be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the restraint means for restraining the displacement member from approaching the adjacent displacement member due to the inertial force at the time of being displaced by the driving force of the driving means is provided, the collision between the displacement members is provided. Can be suppressed. As a result, the spacing between the displacement units can be reduced, so that the arrangement space can be reduced, and for example, a sense of unity can be formed when both displacement members are displaced in the same direction while being arranged side by side.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement unit includes a pinion that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit, a rack in which the pinion is meshed and the displacement member is disposed, and a linear displacement of the rack. A guide member that guides in a state in which displacement in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed, wherein the suppressing unit regulates displacement of the rack in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement, A gaming machine H2 wherein a displacement member is prevented from approaching an adjacent displacement member.

  The displacement member can be linearly displaced by providing a pinion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a rack on which the pinion is meshed and on which the displacement member is provided. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement members can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of the adjacent displacement members. In this case, in consideration of the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each part, the guide member needs to guide the linear displacement of the rack in a state of allowing the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. However, if the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed, the rotation of the rack is caused by the influence of inertia when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started. The displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. For this reason, there is a possibility that the displacement member collides close to the adjacent displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member regulates the displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement, so that the displacement member is adjacent to the displacement member. Is suppressed, so that the displacement member can be prevented from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.

  In the gaming machine H2, the suppressing means includes a contact portion formed to protrude radially outward from the pinion, and a contact portion formed on the rack so that the contact portion can contact. The gaming machine H3, wherein the abutting portion is abutted on the abutted portion to regulate the displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement.

  The displacement member can be linearly displaced by providing a pinion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a rack on which the pinion is meshed and on which the displacement member is provided. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement members can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of the adjacent displacement members. In this case, when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started, the rotational force is applied to the rack due to the effect of the inertial force, so that the displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. You. Therefore, the displacement member may be displaced in a direction approaching the adjacent displacement member and collide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the suppressing means allows the contact portion formed to project radially outward from the pinion, and the contact portion to be able to contact. A contact portion formed on the rack is provided, and when the contact portion is brought into contact with the contact portion, the displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement is regulated. Collision with the adjacent displacement member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the distance between the contact portion and the contacted portion is different depending on the position of the linear displacement of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H3, the distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion varies depending on the position of the linear displacement of the rack. At the position where the rotation of the pinion is started or the position where the displacement speed of the displacement member (rotation speed of the pinion) is changed (that is, the position where the displacement member (rack) is easily affected by the inertial force), the contact portion is exposed. By contacting the contact portion, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member. On the other hand, for example, in a position where the displacement (rotation of the pinion) of the displacement member is in a steady state, the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member By securing an allowable amount of the displacement of the rack in a direction orthogonal to the above, and easily allowing the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance, the load on the driving means can be suppressed and the linear displacement of the rack can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of the collision between the displacement members and the securing of the play of the rack with respect to the guide member.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the contact portion is formed so that at least a portion where a distance between the contact portion and the contact portion is minimum protrudes radially outward from a tooth tip of the pinion, and A gaming machine H5 formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the game machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, at least the portion where the distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion is minimized is radially outward of the tooth tip of the pinion. The rack is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the rack, so that the rack can be prevented from rattling in the rotation axis direction of the pinion. In particular, the portion where the distance between the abutting portion and the abutted portion is minimum is set at a position where the displacement member (rack) is susceptible to the influence of inertia force, and the rack is likely to rattle. It is particularly effective that the contact portion is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the rack.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement unit includes a pinion that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit, a rack in which the pinion is meshed and the displacement member is disposed, and a linear displacement of the rack. A guide member that guides in a state in which displacement in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed, wherein the suppressing unit is separated from an adjacent rack in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member; The gaming machine H6, wherein the rack is biased in a direction to prevent the displacement member from approaching an adjacent displacement member.

  The displacement member can be linearly displaced by providing a pinion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a rack on which the pinion is meshed and on which the displacement member is provided. That is, the displacement trajectories of the displacement members can be adjacent to each other in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity in the displacement of the adjacent displacement members. In this case, in consideration of the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each part, the guide member needs to guide the linear displacement of the rack in a state of allowing the displacement in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. However, if the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the linear displacement is allowed, the rotation of the rack is caused by the effect of the inertial force when the pinion is rotated and the linear displacement of the rack is started. The displacement member is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. For this reason, there is a possibility that the displacement member collides close to the adjacent displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, the suppressing means biases the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack. Accordingly, the displacement member is prevented from approaching the adjacent displacement member, so that the displacement member can be suppressed from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.

  In the gaming machine H6, the rack includes a parallel tooth surface formed in parallel with the direction of the linear displacement, and an inclined tooth surface formed to be inclined with respect to the direction of the linear displacement. The restraining means biases the rack in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and away from an adjacent rack by engaging the pinion with the inclined tooth surface, The gaming machine H7, wherein the displacement member suppresses approaching an adjacent displacement member.

  In the gaming machine H6, the tooth surface of the pinion includes a fixed tooth surface formed with a fixed tooth diameter, and a large-diameter tooth surface having a tooth diameter larger than the fixed tooth surface. By engaging the large-diameter tooth surface with the rack, the rack is biased in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and away from an adjacent rack, and the displacement member is adjacent to the rack. The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the gaming machine H8 suppresses approaching a moving displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine H7 or the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the tooth surface of the rack is provided with an inclined tooth surface, or the tooth surface of the pinion is provided with a large-diameter tooth surface, and the pinion is provided on the inclined tooth surface. Or by meshing the large-diameter tooth surface with the rack, the rack can be biased in a direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member and away from the adjacent rack. That is, since the rack can be separated from the adjacent rack in advance, even when the rack approaches the adjacent rack due to the influence of inertia, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member. .

  In addition, the pinion is meshed with the parallel tooth surface by rotating the pinion from the state where the pinion is meshed with the inclined tooth surface, or from the state where the large-diameter tooth surface is meshed with the rack, or When the linear displacement of the rack is started, the rotational force of the rack generated by the influence of the inertial force can be suppressed as compared with the case where the pinion is rotated from the state where the fixed tooth surface is meshed with the rack. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.

  The gaming machine H6, further comprising: a protrusion protruding from one of the guide members or the rack; and a guide groove formed in the other of the guide member or the rack so that the protrusion is slidably inserted. The groove includes a linear groove extending along the direction of the linear displacement, and an inclined groove formed to be inclined with respect to the direction of the linear displacement. By locating the portion, the rack is biased in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement by the guide member and in a direction away from an adjacent rack, so that the displacement member approaches the adjacent displacement member. A gaming machine H9 characterized by suppressing.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the guide groove has an inclined groove, and the projection is located in the inclined groove, so that the guide groove is adjacent to the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement by the guide member. Can be biased in the direction away from the adjacent rack, i.e., the rack can be pre-separated from the adjacent rack, even if the rack is close to the adjacent rack due to the effect of inertia. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.

  Also, when the pinion is rotated from the position where the protrusion is located in the inclined groove, the linear displacement of the rack is started compared to the case where the pinion is rotated from the state where the protrusion is located in the straight groove. In addition, the rotational force of the rack generated by the influence of the inertial force can be suppressed. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from colliding with the adjacent displacement member.

  The gaming machine H10 according to any one of the gaming machines H2 to H9, wherein the pair of displacement units are disposed so that the engagement surfaces of the pinion and the rack face the opposite sides.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines H2 to H9, the pair of displacement units are disposed in a posture in which the toothing surfaces of the pinion and the rack face each other or in a posture facing the opposite side. The direction in which the displacement member is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement due to the effect of the inertial force can be opposite to each other in the pair of displacement units. That is, when the rack is linearly displaced in one direction, the displacement members are close to each other, while when the rack is linearly displaced in the other direction, the displacement members are separated from each other. Therefore, the suppression means only needs to be able to cope with the case where the rack is linearly displaced in one direction, and does not need to cope with both the case where the rack is linearly displaced in one direction and the case where the rack is linearly displaced in the other direction. Therefore, the structure of the suppressing means can be simplified accordingly.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lifting body 330 as an example>
A base member, and a displacement unit disposed displaceably on the base member, wherein the displacement unit has a first member and an outer shape smaller than the first member, and is formed on a part of the first member. A gaming machine comprising: a second member to be superimposed; and an interposed member interposed between the first member and the second member and formed to have a larger outer shape than the second member. When a member is interposed between the first member and the second member, a side of the interposed member where the second member is not overlapped with the first member is urged toward the first member. A gaming machine I1 characterized by being formed as follows.

  Here, a base member and a displacement unit arranged to be displaceable on the base member are provided, and the displacement unit is formed into a first member and an outer shape smaller than the first member, and a part of the first member. There is known a gaming machine including a second member superimposed on a first member and an intervening member interposed between the first member and the second member and formed with an outer shape larger than the second member. (For example, JP 2010-11899 A). According to such a gaming machine, since the portion where the second member is not overlapped with the first member is opened, the displacement unit uses the opened portion (to make the opened portion face the base member). That is, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for disposing the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first member, the area for interposing the interposed member between the first member and the second member is reduced accordingly. However, there is a problem that the interposed member is easily rattled. When the intervening member is fastened and fixed to the first member by the fastening screw in the portion where the second member is not overlapped (opened portion), it is possible to prevent rattling. The head is protruded. For this reason, the opened portion cannot be used (that is, if the opened portion faces the base member, the head of the fastening screw interferes with the base member), and it is impeded that the displacement unit approaches the base member. . As a result, the space required for disposing the base member and the displacement unit increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, when the interposed member is interposed between the first member and the second member, the side of the interposed member where the second member is not superimposed on the first member is set. Since it is formed so as to be urged toward the first member, the interposed member can be pressed against the first member. As a result, rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  Further, in a portion where the second member is not overlapped (opened portion), there is no need to fasten and fix the intervening member to the first member with a fastening screw, so that interference between the head of the fastening screw and the base member does not occur. Therefore, the displacement unit can be brought close to the base member. Therefore, the space required for disposing the base member and the displacement unit can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I1, the displacement unit includes connecting means for connecting the second member and the interposed member, and the second member has a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the interposed member. Wherein the abutting portion is located on a side where the second member is not overlapped on the first member than a position where the second member and the interposed member are connected by the connecting means. Gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I1, there is provided a connecting means for connecting the second member and the interposed member, and the second member is configured to be in contact with the interposed member. And the contact portion is located on the side where the second member is not overlapped with the first member from the position where the second member and the interposed member are connected by the connecting means. With the connection of the interposed member and the interposed member, the interposed member can be pressed against the first member by bringing the contact portion into contact with the interposed member. That is, it is possible to simplify the assembling work while achieving a structure that suppresses rattling of the interposed member.

  In the gaming machine I2, the female screw threaded into the interposed member, an insertion hole drilled in the second member, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole and screwed into the female screw, A gaming machine I3, wherein a connecting means is formed.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, a female screw threaded in the interposed member, an insertion hole drilled in the second member, and a female screw inserted in the insertion hole are screwed into the female screw. Since the connecting means is formed from the combined fastening screws, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and the play of the interposed member can be suppressed more reliably. That is, when the fastening screw is fastened, the interposed member can be attracted to the second member by the fastening force. Accordingly, the contact portion of the second member can be used as a fulcrum, and the opposite side of the fulcrum (contact portion) from the side where the attraction force is applied can be pressed against the first member. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and the play of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine I2, the connecting means is formed from a locking portion provided on the second member so as to be capable of locking the interposed member, and the locking portion connects the interposed member with the contact member. A gaming machine I4, wherein the interposed member is locked in a state of being biased to the part.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I2, a connecting means is formed from a locking portion formed to be able to lock the interposed member and disposed on the second member. Since the interposed member is locked in a state where the interposed member is urged to the contact portion, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and the rattling of the interposed member can be more reliably suppressed. . That is, since the interposed member is urged to the abutting portion when locked by the locking portion, the attraction force acts on the abutting portion of the second member as a fulcrum with the fulcrum (abutting portion) interposed therebetween. The side opposite to the side to be pressed can be pressed against the first member. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and the play of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  Further, when assembling the displacement unit, the interposition member and the second member can be connected by locking the interlocking member to the interposition member, and the fastening screw can be inserted into the insertion hole or screwed. Since it is not necessary to perform the fastening work, the number of man-hours can be reduced, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I2, the connecting member is formed by compression elastic means interposed between the first member and the interposed member in a state of being compressed and deformed.

  In the gaming machine I2, the connecting member is formed by tensile elastic means interposed in a state of being tensilely deformed between the interposed member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine I5 or I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, the compression elastic means interposed in a compressed and deformed state between the first member and the interposed member, or the interposed member and the Since the connecting member is formed by the tensile elastic means interposed between the two members in a state of being tensilely deformed, the interposed member can be strongly pressed against the first member, and the interposed member has a play. Sticking can be more reliably suppressed. That is, the interposed member can be attracted to the second member by the compression elastic means or the elastic recovery force of the tensile elastic force. Accordingly, the contact portion of the second member can be used as a fulcrum, and the opposite side of the fulcrum (contact portion) from the side where the attraction force is applied can be pressed against the first member. As a result, the interposed member can be firmly pressed against the first member, and the play of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the interposed member includes a substrate on which the light emitting unit is mounted on the surface on the first member side, and a side disposed on the surface on the first member side of the substrate. Wherein the connecting means connects the second member and one side member of the interposed member, and the substrate of the interposed member is brought into contact with the contact member. Machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the interposed member includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface on the first member side, and a substrate on the first member side of the substrate. And a connecting member connecting the second member and the one-side member of the interposed member, and the substrate of the interposed member is brought into contact with the contact member. Pressing to one member can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed. That is, the substrate is weak to the concentration of the partial deformation, and the one-side member bears the connection with the second member by the connection means in which the load is easily concentrated on the connection portion, and the one-side member attracted to the second member. Since the entire substrate can be pressed against the second member, it is possible to suppress the concentration of a partial load on the substrate. As a result, pressing against the first member can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines I3 to I7, the displacement unit includes a holding unit formed on the first member and holding the interposed member, and the holding unit is in contact with the contact portion. A gaming machine I8, wherein the interposed member is held at a position closer to the second member than at a position.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in any of the gaming machines I3 to I7, the displacement unit includes a holding unit formed on the first member and holding the interposed member, and the holding unit abuts on the abutting portion. Since the interposed member is held at a position closer to the second member than the position where the interposed member is connected, when the interposed member is attracted to the second member by the action of the connecting means, the first member is attached to the second member. Can be suppressed from being formed between the first member and the interposed member on the side opposite to the side where the is not overlapped. As a result, the appearance of the displacement unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I8, the interposed member includes a substrate on which light-emitting means is mounted on one surface side, and a one-side member disposed on one surface side of the substrate, and the holding means is provided on one surface of the interposed member. The gaming machine I9, wherein the side member is held, and the substrate of the interposed member is brought into contact with the contact member.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, the interposed member includes a substrate on which light emitting means is mounted on one surface side, and a one-side member disposed on one surface side of the substrate. Since the holding means holds the one surface side member of the interposed member and the substrate of the interposed member is in contact with the contact member, the pressing of the interposed member can be performed more firmly, and The rattling can be suppressed. That is, the substrate is vulnerable to partial deformation concentration, but the one-side member bears the holding by the holding means where the load is likely to concentrate on the portion to be held, so that the concentration of partial load on the substrate can be suppressed. As a result, pressing against the first member can be performed more firmly, and rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the displacement unit includes an engaging portion formed on the first member and an engaged portion formed on the interposed member. An engagement means for restricting relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the first member by engagement with the joining portion, wherein the engagement means is arranged in a region where the second member does not overlap the first member. And in a state where the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged, the engaging portion and the engaged portion are viewed in a direction in which the second member is superimposed on the first member. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that the part overlaps at least in part.

  According to the gaming machine I10, any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9 includes the engaging portion formed on the first member and the engaged portion formed on the intermediate member. Since the engagement means for regulating the relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the first member by the engagement with the first member is provided, the rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed by the amount that the relative rotation can be regulated.

  In this case, the engaging means is provided in a region where the second member does not overlap the first member, and the second member is attached to the first member in a state where the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. When viewed in the direction in which the members are overlapped, the engaging portion and the engaged portion at least partially overlap, and the first member is attached to the second member by utilizing the overlap between the engaging portion and the engaged portion. Can be prevented from floating in the direction away from the first member in the region where the is not overlapped. As a result, rattling of the interposed member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, and I1 to I10, the gaming machines are slot machines. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that: Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10 and I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K2, which is characterized in that: Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F10, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, and I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being integrated with a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmitting member is known. (Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-218093).
However, in the above-described gaming machine, there is a problem that light incident on the light transmitting member tends to be biased toward a region along the optical axis of the light irradiating means.
The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing light incident on a light transmitting member from being biased to a region along an optical axis of a light irradiation unit. The purpose is to do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1 includes a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material, and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmitting member. A partition member for partitioning a space from the light irradiation means to a side end surface of the light transmitting member, wherein the partition member has at least a part of an inner wall that partitions the space, the light transmitting member Non-parallel and non-perpendicular to the front of
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the partition member is interposed between the light irradiating means and a side end surface of the light transmitting member and the light irradiating means is provided. A base member having an opening at a position corresponding to the above, and an inner wall of the opening of the base member defines a space from the light irradiation means to a side end surface of the light transmitting member.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the second technical concept, wherein the base member and the opening are each formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front in the optical axis direction of the light irradiation unit. The part is disposed in a posture in which each side is parallel to each side of the base member, and the light transmitting member is disposed in a posture inclined with respect to the opening.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the light incident on the light transmitting member from being biased to a region along the optical axis of the light irradiation unit.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the product cost can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, formability can be ensured.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines )
1 00-104 board box
4 22 second passage forming member (second passage member)
4 24 connection member
424e torsion spring (biasing means)
5 20, 2520 First passage forming member (first passage member )
2561 body member (connection member)
2562 torsion spring (biasing means)

Claims (2)

A first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other; A communicating state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member; and a first passage member and a second passage member in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which
The first passage member is disposed so as to be displaceable at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the first passage member is displaced in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. And a connecting member for communicating between one ends of the second passage member, and an urging means for applying an urging force to the connecting member to maintain the connecting member at a predetermined position .
Game and in the separated state, characterized by Rukoto is the connecting member is arranged at a position to restrict the ball entrance of the sphere to the position or the second passage member for regulating the discharge of balls from said first passage member Machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images